Skip to main content

Full text of "Home-made toys for girls and boys : wooden and cardboard toys, mechanical and electrical toys"

See other formats


NY  PUBLIC  LIBRARY     THE  BRANCH  LIBRARIES 


3  3333  02373  6214 


'TOE  CENTRAL  CHILDREN'S  ROOM 
PONNELL  LIBRARY  CENTER 
SST  53  STREET 
IYQRK,  N.Y.  10019 


HOME-MADE  TOYS 

FOR 
GIRLS  AND  BOYS 


8vo 

BOOKS   BY  A.  NE 

ELY   HALL 

undreds  of  full-pagt 

Cloth.     Illustrated  with  f 

and  working  drawings 

by  the  author 

THE 

and  Norman  P. 

Hall 

(  Price  net  $  1 
I  Postpaid      1 

.60 

.82 

BOY  CRAFTSMAN    . 

HANDICRAFT  FOR  HANDY  BOYS  \  Price  net  $  2°° 

(  Postpaid      2.25 

THE 
LOT 

HANDY   BOY 

<  Price  net  $  1.60 
(  Postpaid      1.82 

RD  CO.,  BOSTON 

HROP,  LEE  &  SHEPA 

CHAPTER    I 

Home-made  Windmills 

The  Paper  Pinwheel  —  The  Pinion-wheel  Windmill  —  To  mount  the 
Pinion-wheel  —  The  Four-blade  Windmill — To  mount  the  Windmill  — 
The  Eight-blade  Windmill  — The  Hub— The  Eight  Blades  —  The 
Shaft  —  The  Tail  —  To  pivot  the  Windmill — To  operate  a  Toy  Jump- 
ing-Jack. 

CHAPTER    II 
Home-made  Kites 

How  to  make  a  Malay  —  The  Sticks — Framing  the  Sticks  —  Cover- 
ing the  Framework  —  Attaching  the  Bridle  —  Flying-line  —  The  Box- 
kite —  The  Kite  Sticks  —  The  Side  Frames  —  Covering  for  the  End 
Cells  —  Assembling  the  Kite  —  Attaching  the  Bridle  —  A  Good  Hand 
Kite-reel — A  Body  Kite-reel. 

CHAPTER    III 

A  Home-made  Model  Aeroplane 

Accuracy  in  Model  Construction  —  The  Most  Successful  Type  of 
Model  — The  Fuselage  — The  Thrust  Bearings— The  Bow  Hooks  — 
The  Main  Plane  — The  Elevator  —  The  Fin  — The  Propellers  — How- 
to  prepare  the  Propellers  —  The  Propeller  Blank  —  The  Propeller- 
shafts  —  The  Motors  —  The  Home-made  Motor-winder  —  How  the 
Egg-beater  winds  the  Motors —  Care  in  winding  the  Motors —  Position 
to  take  for  launching  a  Model. 

CHAPTER    IV 

A  Home-made  Toy  Motor-boat 

How  operated — The  Hull  Bottom  — The  Sides  — The  Deck  — The 
Propeller  — The  Propeller-shaft— The  Bearing  Plate  —  The  Thrust 
Bearing  — The  Rubber-band  Motor  — To  wind  the  Motor— How  to 
elaborate  upon  the  Design  and  Construction. 

vii 


viii  CONTENTS 


CHAPTER   V 

PAGE 

Home-made  Toy  Water-motors 38 

A  Varnish-can  Water-motor — The  Case  —  The  Water- motor  Wheel 
—  The  Eight  Paddles  — The  Wheel  Shaft  — An  Outlet— A  Pulley- 
belt  —  Pulley-wheels  —  Connecting  up  the  Water-motor  —  Another 
Water-motor  —  The  Water-motor  Wheel  —  The  Wheel  Supports  —  To 
mount  the  Wheel  —  The  Pulley  Wheel  —  The  Water-motor  Case. 


CHAPTER   VI 

A  Home-made  Toy  Railway 47 

The  Trolley-line  —  Supports  for  Trolley-line  —  Power  for  Operating 

—  Railway  —  Tracks  —  The  Cars — A  Gondola  Car — A  Street  Car  — 
Other  Cars  —  Operation  of  the  Railway — A  Station. 

CHAPTER   VII 

Home-made  Toy  Elevators 59 

A  Toy  Elevator  that  appears  Magical  in  its  Operation  —  Adapting 
Elevator  to  Toy  Office  Building  —  Floors  —  Partitions  —  The  Elevator 
Car  —  The  Elevator  Guides  —  The  Cables  —  The  Counter-balance  — 
The  Smoke-stack  —  The   Overhead  Pulleys — How  the  Car  operates 

—  Ballast  —  To  make  the  Car  Rise  —  A  Simple  Control  —  Two  Levers 

—  An  Outdoor  Elevator — 'The  Guide  Supports  —  The  Car  —  The 
Guides  —  The  Counter-balance  —  The  Lifting  Cable  —  The  Lowering 
Cable. 

CHAPTER    VIII 

Home-made  Mechanical  Toys .71 

The  Simple  Construction  of  Small  Mechanical  Toys  —  A  Buzz-saw 
Whirligig  —  Operating  the  Whirligig  —  The  Clog-dancer  —  A  Toy 
Jumping-Jack  —  A  Cricket-rattle  —  The  Turtle  Toy  —  To  make  the 
Turtle  Crawl. 

CHAPTER    IX 
Home-made  Tops 79 

Top  Spinning  on  the  South  Sea  Islands  —  Clock  Wheel  Tops  —  A 
Rug-tack  Top  —  A  Spool  Top  —  A  Spinning  Top  Race-track  —  A 
Shoe-polish  Can  Top  —  A  Spiral  Top — 'A  Merry-go-round  Top  — 
How  the  Top  Spins —  Horses  and  Riders  —  A  Flag. 


CONTENTS  ix 

CHAPTER  X 

PAGE 

Home-made  Clockwork  Toys 88 

The  Necessary  Materials  —  How  to  prepare  the  Clockwork  —  The 
Merry-go-round  —  The  Standard — The  Tent  —  The  Tent-poles — The 
Horses  — The  Sleighs  — The  Shafts  — The  Girl  Riders  — The  Boy 
Riders  —  The  Platform  —  How  to  operate  the  Merry-go-round  —  Other 
Animals  —  A  Miniature  Ferris  Wheel  —  The  Standard  —  The  Clock- 
work Motor —  The  Station  Platform  — The  Wheel  — Rims — Hubs  — 
Spokes  —  Assembling  the  Wheel  —  The  Cars  —  Axles  —  How  to  mount 
the  Wheel  —  The  Platform  Steps  — The  "Flying  Airships  "  — The 
Standard  —  The  Mast  —  The  Cars  —  Increasing  the  Speed  of  the 
Clockwork  —  An  Electric  Motor  —  An  Automobile  —  The  Frame  — 
The  Belt  —  Testing  the  Machine  —  The  Cardboard  Sides  —  The 
Wheels  —  The  Mud-guards  —  The  Lamps  —  The  Steering-wheel  — 
The  Horn  —  The  Brake  —  The  Chauffeur  —  Painting  the  Machine  — 
An  Automobile  Delivery  Wagon — The  Cardboard  Sides  —  The  Wheels 

—  Other  Portions  —  Painting  the  Wagon  —  A  Clockwork  Railway. 

CHAPTER   XI 

Home-made  Electrical  Toys 117 

An  Electro-magnet  Derrick  —  The  Electro-magnet  —  A  Home-made 
Switch  —  The  Derrick  —  The  Windlass — -The  Hoisting  Cables — How 
the  Derrick  Works  —  A  Toy  Shocking  Machine  —  The  Induction-coil 

—  The  Primary-coil  —  The  Secondary-coil  —  The  Handles  —  An  Inter- 
rupter —  How  the  Interrupter  Works  —  A  Toy  Electric  Motor  Truck  — 
The  Wheels  — The  Upper  Shaft  — The  Belts  — The  Battery  — The 
Bi-chromate  Battery  Fluid  —  Amalgamating  a  Zinc  Pencil  —  The  Seat 
and  Canopy-top  —  The  Seat-arms  —  The  Steering-wheel  —  The  Levers. 

CHAPTER   XII 

A  Home-made  Toy  Shooting  Gallery 140 

The  Framework  —  The  Circular  Target  —  The  Animal  Targets  — 
The  Card-shooting  Pistol  —  How  to  number  the  Targets  — ■  How  to 
shoot  at  the  Targets. 

CHAPTER  XIII 

A  Home-made  Doll-house 145 

The  Building  Material  — The  Floor  Plans— The  Partitions —  The 
Elevator-shaft  — The  Side  Walls  — The  Rear  Wall  — The  Front  Wall 

—  The  Windows— The  Roof— The  Chimney — An  Elevator  — The 
Car— The    Guide-wires  —  The    Pulleys  — The    Chain    Cable  — The 


x  CONTENTS 

PAGE 

Counter-balance  —  The   Gable-ends  —  Spring-catches  —  The    Stairway 

—  Stringers  —  Treads  and  Risers  —  Newel-posts  —  Hand-rails — Bal- 
usters—  The  Front  Steps — The  Window  Openings  —  The  Window 
Glass  —  The  Front  and  Rear  Doors  —  The  Outside  Trimmings  —  The 
Interior  Woodwork —  Setting  the  Nail-heads  —  Painting. 

CHAPTER   XIV 

Furnishing  the  Home-made  Doll-house    ' 156 

The  Walls  and  Ceiling  —  Hardwood  Floors  — ■  Carpets  —  Rugs  — 
Window-shades — Lace  Curtains —  Portieres  —  Pictures  —  A  Cosey- 
corner — Buying  Furnishings — Making  Furniture. 

CHAPTER   XV 
A  Home-made  Toy  Stable 160 

Dimensions  of  Stable  —  The  First  Story — -The  Roof  —  The  Gable- 
end  —  The  Stall  Partitions  —  The  Feed-troughs  —  Windows  —  Ladder 
to  Hay- loft — Feed-hoist  —  The  Drop-front — A  Stable  Door  —  Paint- 
ing—  If  you  prefer  a  Garage. 

CHAPTER   XVI 
A  Home-made  Doll  Apartment  Building      ......     165 

A  New  Idea  in  Doll-houses  —  How  the  Three  Units  are  arranged  to 
form  a  Three-story  Building  or  Six-room  Apartment  —  Building  Mate- 
rial—  The  Room  Dimensions  —  The  First  Story  Unit  — The  Second 
Story  Unit — -The  Third  Story  Unit  —  The  Door  and  Window  Open- 
ings—  The  Bay  Windows  —  The  Joints  between  the  Units  —  The  Roof 
Construction  —  The  Chimney  —  The  Windows  —  The  Front  Door  — 
The  Inside  Doorways  —  The  Interior  Trim  —  A  Fireplace — 'Lighting 
Fixtures  —  Decorating — Painting  the  Outside  Walls. 

CHAPTER   XVII 
Home-made  Doll  Furniture 174 

Metal  Furniture — Miniature  Mission  Furniture — Material  —  Draw- 
ing the  Patterns  and  Enlarging  by  Squares —  The  Chairs  —  The  Settee 

—  Tables  —  A  Dining-room  Table — A  Sideboard  —  A  Mirror — The 
Grandfather's  Clock  —  Kitchen  Furniture  —I    e  Beds  —  The  Dresser 

—  A  Wash-stand  —  Finishing. 

Other  Cigar-box  Furniture 187 

A  Folding-bed —  A  Dresser —  A  Wardrobe. 


Figs.  287  and  288.     An  Auto  Delivery- Wagon  Built  of  Cigar-Boxes. 
(Seepage  192.) 


HOME-MADE  TOYS 

FOR 
GIRLS  AND  BOYS 

Wbodenand  Cardboard  Toys, 
Mechanical  and  Eleetr  ical  Toys 

By  ANeelyHall 

Author  of  "The  Boy  Craftsman, 

"Handicraft  for  Handy  Boys, 

'The  handy  Boy  "Etc. 

With  over  three  hundred  illustrations  andwork- 
bio-orawingrl  w  <ne  author  and  Nor  manP  Hall 


BOSTON 

LOTHROP,  LEE  &•  SHEPARD  CO. 


Copyright,  1915,  by 

LOTHROP,   LEE  &   SHEPARD  COMPANY 

Published,  August,  191 5 


All  rights  reserved 


HOME-MADE   TOYS    FOR   GIRLS    AND    BOYS 


THE  HEW   : 

'PUBLIC  LIE, 

A8TOR,   LENOX   AND 
^TILOEN  FOUNDATIONS. 


NottaooU  $Tt88 

J.  8.  Cushing  Co.  —Berwick  &  Smith  Co. 

Norwood.  Mass.,  U.S.A. 


110 

H 


Constructive  ideas  expel  destructive  ideas  from  the  juvenile  mind. 

INTRODUCTORY    NOTES 

Through  the  author's  handicraft  volumes,  and  magazine  and 
newspaper  articles,  thousands  of  boys  and  girls  who  never  real- 
ized they  could  make  their  own  toys,  have  succeeded  in  con- 
structing models  which  would  do  credit  to  Santa  Claus'  master 
toy-makers. 

The  success  of  this  new  home  industry  has  suggested  the 
need  of  a  volume  devoted  entirely  to  toy-making,  and  in  Home- 
made Toys  for  Girls  and  Boys  the  author  has  brought 
together  a  large  number  of  the  toy  ideas  from  his  former 
handicraft  volumes,  and  from  his  articles  published  in  the 
Ladies'  Home  Journal,  Woman's  Home  Companion,  Good  House- 
keeping, the  Boys'  Magazine,  and  other  publications,  and  he  be- 
lieves that  as  collected  and  arranged  the  material  will  be  found 
a  veritable  gold-mine  of  toy-making  information. 

Go  to  any  toy  store  and  price  the  toys  similar  to  those  de- 
scribed within  these  covers,  then  estimate  if  you  can  how  much 
the  other  toys  you  do  not  find  would  cost  if  manufactured,  and 
you,  will,  discover,  that  one  hundred  dollars  would  not  cover 
their  value.  >  On£  splendid  thing  about  these  home-made  toys 
is  that  the  rreater  part  of  them  require  little  more  than  the 
pick-up  matenul'  found  at  home.  Few  boys  and  girls  are  given 
a  one  .hundred  d'olJar  -assortment  of  toys  at  a  time,  yet  any  one 
can  own  a  collection  of  this  value  who  is  willing  to  spend  the 
time  necessary  to  follow  the  instructions  given  in  this  book. 
Probably,  though,  some  of  the  toys  will  be  wanted  now,  and 
the  others  one,  two  or  three  seasons  hence,  because,  you  see, 
the  book  is  an  all-the-year-round  handy  book  with  suggestions 
for  every  season.  Some  of  the  toys  will  be  of  especial  interest 
to  boys,  yet  girls  who  like  what  boys  like  will  enjoy  making 
them  also. 


vi  INTRODUCTORY  NOTES 

Home-made  toys  are  generally  longer  lived  than  store  toys 
because  the  boy  or  girl  who  expends  a  certain  amount  of  effort 
producing  gives  them  better  care.  Home-made  toys  have  a 
greater  value  than  boughten  ones  because  there  is  as  much 
fun  making  them  as  playing  with  them.  Doing  something 
interesting,  getting  satisfying  results  out  of  the  work,  putting 
an  idea  into  tangible  form,  and  having  a  toy  to  show  of  which 
it  can  be  said,  "  I  made  this  all  myself," — these  are  the  factors 
in  toy-making  so  fascinating  to  boys  and  girls. 

It  is  no  less  a  child's  nature  to  want  to  do  that  which  is 
most  pleasing  to  him,  than  an  adult's,  so  why  not  encourage 
this  wholesome  activity  of  toy-making  to  which  the  child  takes 
as  readily  as  a  duck  takes  to  water  ?  It  trains  the  mind  to 
think  clearly,  the  hands  to  work  cleverly,  replaces  destructive 
thoughts  with  constructive  ideas,  and,  in  making  the  boy  or 
girl  dependent  upon  himself  or  herself  for  toys,  is  invaluable 
in  developing  resourcefulness. 

Recognizing  how  easily  the  child's  interest  is  attracted  and 
held  by  anything  of  a  building  nature,  toy  manufacturers  have 
placed  scores  of  so-called  "  construction  sets  "  upon  the  market, 
but,  though  excellent  as  these  outfits  are,  the  toys  they  form 
are  merely  assembled,  not  really  mads/by'the/boy  cr  gfirij  and 
much  of  the  value  of  making  is  lost.  -  Exactly  as  goodc  models 
as  those  assembled  with  "construction  se'cs^"  cai<  be  made  of 
pick-up  materials,  as  chapters  in  this  book'show.  In  fact,  some 
of  the  models  in  the  manufacturers'  mstrvictiou  pa.r.phlets  — 
merry-go-rounds,  Ferris  wheels  and  swings  —  are  almost  iden- 
tical with  home-made  models  devised  long  ago  by  the  author 
for  his  readers.  Furthermore,  there  are  many,  very  many  toys 
in  Home-made  Toys  for  Girls  and  Boys  which  are  beyond 

the  limited  possibilities  of  "construction  sets." 

A.  N.  H. 
Oak  Park,  Illinois, 
May  31,  1915. 


CONTENTS  xi 


CHAPTER   XVIII 

PAGE 

Home-made  Cigar-box  Toys 191 

Material  —  Cutting  —  An  Express-wagon  —  A  Cart — An  Auto  De- 
livery-wagon—  A  Jack-in-the-box  —  A  Round-seated  Chair — A  Round 
Center- table  —  A  Dining-table  —  A  Square-seated  Chair — A  Doll's 
Cradle  —  Finishing  the  Cigar-box  Wood. 


CHAPTER   XIX 

Home-made  Spool  and  Cardboard  Toys 196 

Material  —  A  Baby  Carriage  —  A  Two-wheel  Cart  —  A  Toy  Merry- 
go-round —  A  Teeter-board — A  Doll  Swing  —  A  Sofa  —  A  Chair  — 
A  Square  Center-table  —  A  Round  Center-table. 

CHAPTER    XX 

A  Home-made  Toy  Mail-box 205 

Playing  Postman — Material  for  Mail-box  —  The  Sides,  Ends,  and 
Bottom  of  Box  —  The  Top  —  The  Letter-drop  —  The  Collection-drop 

—  Reinforcing  the  Corners  —  Covering  the  Box  —  A  Collection  Sched- 
ule Card  —  How  to  hang  up  the  Mail-box —  A  Mail-bag  —  The  Way  to 
play  Post-office. 

CHAPTER    XXI 

A  Home-made  Reflectoscope 210 

The  Working  Principle  of  the  Reflectoscope  —  Material  for  making 
One  —  The  Lens  Opening  —  Ventilator  Holes  —  The  Interior  Arrange- 
ment— A  Hood  for  the  Ventilators  —  If  Oil  Lamps  are  Used  —  If 
Electric  Light  is  Used  —  How  to  mount  the  Lens  —  Puttying  Cracks 

—  Painting  the  Inside  of  the  Box  —  The  Back  Boards  —  The  Picture 
Holder  —  How  the  Lens  reverses  Pictures  —  Adjustments. 

Index      .  215 


LIST   OF   HALF-TONE  ILLUSTRATIONS 

(In  addition  to  346  text  illustrations) 

Figs.  287  and  288.    An  Auto  Delivery-wagon  built  of  Cigar  Boxes  (Page 

192)        .         .         .         .         .         •         .         •        Frontispiece 

FACING   PAGE 

34 
72 

76 
90 

104 
146 

166 

192 


Fig. 

48. 

Fig. 

108. 

Fig. 

109. 

Fig. 

no. 

Fig. 

114. 

Fig- 

115. 

Fig. 

135- 

Fig 

136. 

Fig. 

137- 

Fig. 

138. 

Fig. 

160. 

Fig. 

161. 

Fig. 

220. 

Fig. 

221. 

Fig. 

243- 

Fig. 

244. 

Fig. 

284. 

Fig. 

285. 

Fig. 

289. 

Fig. 

290. 

Fig. 

291. 

Fig- 

292. 

Fig. 

293- 

Fig. 

294. 

Fig- 

295. 

Fig- 

325- 

Fig 

326. 

Launching  the  Toy  Motor-boat      .... 
The  Buzz-saw  whizzes  when  you  twist  the  Cord     ] 
The  Eccentric  Clog-dancer  is  a  Circus  in  Himself  } 
Pull  the  String  and  Jack  jumps  comically        .         J 
Whirling  the  Cricket-rattle  makes  it  Chirp      | 
The  Crawling  Turtle's  Shell  is  a  Jelly-mould  J 
A  Merry-go-round     1 
A  Clockwork  Motor 
A  Ferris  Wheel 
A  Flying  Airship    . 
The  Car  Completed  j 
The  Framework      .  \ 
The  Home-made  Doll-house  .  | 
Interior  View  of  Doll-house    .  J 
The  Most  Stylish  Apartments  in  Doll  Town  .  ] 
How  the  Three  Stories  are  arranged  side  by  ) 
side  to  form  a  Six-room  Apartment        .  J 
An  Express-wagon  \ 
A  Cart  .  .         .  /      * 

A  Jack-in-the-box  .         .         .  ) 

The  Skeleton  of  the  Jack-in-the-box  | 
A  Round-seated  Chair  .         .         .  | 
A  Round  Center-table    . 
A  Dining-table 
A  Square-seated  Chair   . 
A  Doll's  Cradle      . 
The  Home-made  Mail-box  strapped  to  the  Face  of  a  Door 
The  Home-made  Mail-box  strapped  to  a  Chair-back 


194-195 


HOME-MADE  TOYS 

FOR 
GIRLS  AND  BOYS 


HOME-MADE  TOYS 


FOR  GIRLS  AND  BOYS 


No  mechanical  toy  is  more  interesting  to  make,  nor 
more  interesting  to  watch  in  operation,  than  a  miniature 
windmill.  It  is  a  very  simple  toy  to  construct,  and  the 
material  for  making 
one  can  usually  be 
found  at  hand,  which 
are  two  reasons  why 
nearly  every  boy  and 
girl  at  one  time  or  an- 
other builds  one. 

The  Paper  Pin  wheel 
shown  in  Fig.  i  is  one 
of  the  best  whirlers 
ever  devised.  A  slight 
forward  thrust  of  the 
stick  handle  upon 
which  it  is  mounted  starts  it  in  motion,  and  when  you  run 
with  the  stick  extended  in  front  of  you  it  whirls  at  a 
merry  speed. 

A  piece  of  paper  8  or  10  inches  square  is  needed  for  the 
pinwheel.     Fold    this    piece    of    paper    diagonally  from 


Fig.  i. — The  Paper  Pinwheel  is  the  Simplest 
Pinwheel  to  Make. 


HOME-MADE  TOYS  FOR   GIRLS  AND  BOYS 


corner  to  corner,  both  ways.     Then  open  the  paper,  and 

with  a  pair  of  scissors  cut  along 
the  diagonal  creases,  from  the 
corners  to  within  J  inch  of  the 
center  (Fig.  2).  Next,  fold  cor- 
ners A,  B,  C,  and  D  over  to  the 
center,  as  shown  in  Fig.  3,  run  a 
pin  through  the  corners  and 
through  the  center  of  the  sheet 
Fig.  2. —  Diagram  for  Paper    0f  paper,  drive  the  point  of  this 

pin    into    the    end    of    the    stick 
handle,    and    the   pinwheel    will    be    completed. 

The  Pinion-Wheel  Windmill  in  Fig.  4  may  be  made  of 
cardboard  or  tin.  A  circular  piece  10  or  12  inches  in  di- 
ameter is  required. 
After  marking  out 
the  outer  edge  with 
a  compass,  describe 
an  inner  circle 
about  1  inch  in- 
side of  it ;  then  draw 
two  lines  through 
the  center  at  right 
angles  to  each  other, 
and  another  pair  at 
an  angle  of  45  de- 
grees    tO     these.  Fig.  3.  —  How  the  Paper  Pinwheel  is  Folded. 

These  lines  are  shown  by  the  heavy  radial  lines  in  Fig.  5. 

f 


HOME-MADE  WINDMILLS 


One-half  inch  from  each  of  these 
line,  as  indicated  by 
dotted  lines  in  Fig.  5. 
The  next  thing  to  do 
is  to  cut  out  the  disk, 
and  cut  along  the 
heavy  lines  just  as 
far  as  the  lines  are 
shown  in  the  dia- 
gram (Fig.  5),  and  SPOOL  HUB 
then  to  bend  up  the 
blades  thus  sepa- 
rated,   to    an    angle 


lines   draw   a  parallel 


Fig.  4.  —  A  Pinion- Wheel  Windmill. 


of  about  45  degrees,  bending  on  the  second  set  of  radial 

lines  (dotted  lines  in  Fig.  5). 
You  had  better  make  a 
cardboard  pinion-wheel 
first,  then  a  tin  one  after- 
wards, as  cardboard  is  so 
much  easier  to  cut.  A  pair  of 
heavy  shears  will  be  neces- 
sary for  cutting  a  tin  wheel, 
and  a  cold  chisel  for  separat- 
ing the  edges  of  the  blades. 
To  Mount  the  Pinion- 
Wheel  drive  a  long  nail 
through  the  center,  through  the  hole  in  a  spool,  and  into  the 
end  of  a  stick.     Then  nail  the  stick  to  a  post  or  a  fence  top. 


Fig. 


Diagram   for   Pinion- Wheel 
Windmill. 


HOME-MADE  TOYS  FOR  GIRLS  AND  BOYS 


The  Four-blade  Windmill  shown  in  Fig.  6  has  a  hub  4 
inches  in  diameter  and  1  inch  thick  (Fig.  7).  This  should 
be  cut  out  of  hard  wood.  Draw  two  lines  across  one  face, 
through  the  center,  and  at  right  angles  to  each  other. 
Then  carry  these  lines  across  the  edge  of  the  block,  not 
at  right  angles  to  the  sides,  but  at  an  angle  of  45  degrees. 

Saw  along  these  lines 
to  a  depth  of  if 
inches.  The  ends  of 
the  windmill  blades 
are  to  fit  in  these 
slots. 

Cut  the  blades  of 
equal  size,  9  inches 
long,  5  inches  wide 
on  the  wide  edge, 
and  i|  inches  wide 
on  the  narrow  edge, 
and  fasten  them  in 
the  slots  with  nails. 
With  the  blades  in 
position,  pivot  the  hub  to  the  end  of  the  windmill  shaft, 
a  stick  20  inches  long  (Fig.  6).  The  end  opposite  to 
that  to  which  the  hub  is  pivoted  is  whittled  round, 
and  slotted  with  a  saw  to  receive  a  tail  (Fig.  8).  The 
tail  may  be  of  the  same  size  as  the  blades,  though  it  is 
shown  shorter  in  the  illustration. 

Mount  the  Windmill  upon  a  post,  pivoting  its  shaft  at 


Fig.  6.  —  A  Four-blade  Windmill. 

Fig.  7.  — Hub. 

Fig.  8.  —  How  to  Slot  End  of  Shaft  for  Tail. 


HOME-MADE  WINDMILLS  5 

the  balancing  center  with  a  nail  or  screw.  Bore  a 
hole  large  enough  so  the  shaft  will  turn  freely  upon 
the  pivot,  and  the  windmill  will  thus  keep  headed  into 
the  wind. 

The  Eight-blade  Windmill  in  Fig.  9  has  a  spool  hub 
(Fig.  10),  and  blades  made  of  cigar-box  wood,  shingles, 
tin,  or  cardboard  (Fig.  11).     You  will  see  by  Figs.  10  and 


Fig.  9. — An  Eight-blade  Windmill. 


11  that  the  blades  are  nailed  to  the  side  of  short  spoke 
sticks,  and  the  sticks  are  driven  into  holes  bored  in 
the  spool  hub.  The  hub  turns  on  the  rounded  end 
of  the  shaft  stick  (Fig.  12),  and  the  square  end  of 
this  shaft  is  slotted  to  receive  the  fan-shaped  tail 
(Figs.  12  and  13). 

For  the  Hub  use  a  large  ribbon-spool.     You  can  get  one 
at  any  drygoods  store.     Locate  eight  holes  around  the 


HOME-MADE  TOYS  FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


center  of  the  spool  at  equal  distances  from  one  another, 
and  bore  these  with  a  gimlet  or  bit,  or  cut  them  with  the 
small  blade  of  your  jack-knife. 

Cut  the  Eight  Blades  6  inches  long,  5  inches  wide  on 
their  wide  edge,  and  ij  inches  wide  on  their  narrow  edge. 
Prepare  the  hub  sticks  about  §  inch  by  f  inch  by  4§  inches 


Fig.  11 


Fig.  10 


Washer — -^     Fig.  12 

Fig.  10.  —  Spool  Hub.     Fig.  ii.  —  Blades.     Fig.  12.  —  Shaft.      Fig.  13. — Tail. 


in  size,  and  whittle  one  end  pointed  to  fit  in  the  hub  (Fig. 
11).  Fasten  the  blades  to  the  spokes  with  nails  long 
enough  to  drive  through  the  spokes  and  clinch  on  the  under 
side.  Glue  the  spokes  in  the  hub  holes,  turning  them  so 
the  blades  will  stand  at  about  the  angle  shown. 

The  Shaft  should  be  made  of  a  hard  wood  stick  about 
J  inch  by  i^  inches  by  30  inches  in  size.  Cut  the  round 
end  small  enough  so  the  hub  will  turn  freely  on  it,  and 


HOME-MADE  WINDMILLS 


punch  a  small  hole  through  it  so  a  brad  may  be  driven 
through  to  hold  the  hub  in  place.  Cut  the  slot  in  the 
square  end  with  a  saw. 

Cut  the  Tail  of  the  shape  shown  in  Fig.  13. 

Pivot  the  Windmill  upon  the  top  of  a  post  support,  in 
the    same    manner    as    directed    for 
the  other  windmills. 

Figure  14  shows  how  the  toy  wind- 
mill may  be  rigged  up 

To  Operate  a  Toy  Jumping- Jack, 
by  supporting  the  jumping-jack  on 
a  bracket,  and  connecting   its  string 


Fig.  14.  —  How  the  Windmill  may  be  Rigged  up  to  Operate  a  Toy  Jumping- Jack. 

to  the  hub  of  the  windmill.  You  can  make  your  jumping- 
jack  like  the  one  in  Fig.  no,  the  details  of  which  are 
shown  in  Fig.   113. 

Cut  the  upright  of  the  bracket  (A,  Figs.  14  and  15) 
14  inches  long,  and  the  crosspiece  (B)  7  inches  long.  Nail 
A  to  B,  and  nail  the  jumping-jack  at  its  center  to  the  end 
of  B  (Fig.   15).     Fasten  the  triangular  block  (C)  to  the 


8 


HOME-MADE  TOYS  FOR  GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


Fig.  1 6 


lower  end  of  A,  and  then  nail  both  A  and  C  to  the  edge 

of  the  shaft  at  a  point 
that  will  bring  the  string 
of  the  jumping-jack  a 
trifle  beyond  the  windmill 
blades. 

Fasten  a  small  stick 
with  a  brad  driven  in  one 
end,  in  notches  cut  in  the 
hub's  flanges  (Fig.  16), 
and  connect  the  brad  and 
Jack's  string  with  a  piece 
of  wire  or  strong  string. 
Then  as  the  windmill  re- 
volves it  will  operate  the  toy  in  the  manner  indicated 
in  Figs.  14  and  15. 


Fig 


IS- 


Fig.  16. 


Fig.  15 
—  How    the    Jumping-jack   is 

Supported. 
Spool  Hub. 


CHAPTER   II 

HOME-MADE   KITES 

The  Malay  tailless  kite  is  probably  the  most  practical 
kind  ever  invented.  It  will  fly  in  a  wind  that  the  tail 
variety  could  not  withstand,  and  it  will  fly  in  a  breeze  too 


Fig.  17.  —  A  Malay  Tailless  Kite. 

light  to  carry  up  most  other  forms  of  kites.  It  is  also  a 
strong  pulling  kite,  and  can  be  used  for  sending  aloft  lan- 
terns and  flags.  For  the  purpose  of  lifting,  the  pulling 
strength  can  be  doubled  by  flying  two  Malays  in  tandem. 
How  to  Make  a  Malay.     Figure  17  shows  a  Malay  kite 


TO 


HOME-MADE  TOYS  FOR   GIRLS   AND   BOYS 


in  flight,  Fig.  18  a  detail  of  the  completed  kite,  Fig.  19 
the  completed  framework,  and  Figs.  20,  21,  and  22  the 
details  for  preparing  the  frame  sticks. 

The  Sticks.  This  kite  has  a  vertical  stick  and  a  bow- 
stick,  each  of  which  should  be  40  inches  long,  about  f 
inch  wide,  and  |  inch  thick,  for  a  kite  of  medium  size. 
In  the  cutting  of  the  sticks  lies  half  the  secret  of  making  a 

kite  that  will  fly  suc- 
cessfully. 

Drive  a  small  nail  or 
large  tack  into  each  end 
of  the  two  sticks,  to 
fasten  the  framing- 
string  to  (Figs.  20  and 
21),  and  notch  the  side 
edges  of  the  bow-stick 
near  each  end  for  the 
attachment  of  the  bow- 
string (Figs.  21  and  22). 
The  amount  to  bend 
the  bow-stick  is  important.  For  a  kite  with  a  bow  40 
inches  long  the  distance  between  the  string  and  stick 
should  be  6  inches  (Fig.  21).  Use  a  strong  twine  for 
the  bow-string,  and  tie  it  securely  to  the  notched  ends. 

Framing  the  Sticks.  Fasten  the  bow-stick  at  its  exact 
center  to  the  vertical  stick,  placing  it  4  inches  down  from 
the  top  of  the  vertical  stick,  as  indicated  in  Fig.  19.  Drive 
a  couple  of  brads  through  the  two  sticks  to  hold  them 


Fig.  18. 


Completed  Malay  Kite  with  Bell} 
Band  Attached. 


HOME-MADE  KITES 


ii 


MAKE  THIS 
DISTANCE 

INCHES 


together,  and  then  reinforce  the  connection  by  wrapping 
the  joint  with  strong  linen  thread,  crossing  the  thread  in 
the  manner  shown. 

When  the  two  sticks  have  been  joined,  connect  their 
ends  with  the  framing-string.  Stretch  this  string  from 
stick  to  stick,  and  tie  securely  to  the  end  nails.  Instead 
of  the  end  nails,  the  sticks 
may  be  notched  to  receive 
the  framing-string,  but  the 
nails  are  more  satisfactory 
because  the  string  can  be 
tied  fast  to  them  and  will 
not  slip. 

Covering  the  Frame- 
work. The  strong  light- 
weight brown  wrapping- 
paper  now  so  generally 
used  makes  an  excellent 
covering  for  the  frame- 
work.     A  few  sheets  can 


Fig.  19.  —  Framework  of  Malay  Kite. 


be  purchased  at  a  near-by  store  for  the  purpose.  You 
will  likely  have  to  paste  together  two  or  more  sheets  to 
make  one  large  enough.  The  paper  should  be  placed  on 
the  outer  face  of  the  bow-stick,  and  should  be  allowed 
a  little  fullness  instead  of  being  stretched  tight  as  on 
hexagonal  tail  kites.  Lap  the  edges  of  the  paper  over 
the  framing-string  in  the  ordinary  way  of  covering 
a  kite. 


12 


HOME-MADE  TOYS  FOR   GIRLS   AND   BOYS 


Attach  the  Bridle  at  the  intersection  of  the  bow-stick 
and  vertical  stick,  and  at  the  lower  end  of  the  vertical 
stick  (Fig.  1 8),  and  make  it  of  the  right  length  so  when 
held  over  to  one  side  it  will  reach  to  the  end  of  the  bow,  as 

indicated  in  Fig.  18.     Tie 


Nail 


Nail-** 
o 
o 


Fig.  22 


MAKE -THIS 
DISTANCE 
6  -INCHES 


the  flying  line  securely  at 
the  point  A  (Fig.  18) ;  then 
the  kite  will  be  ready  for  its 
maiden  flight. 

Flying-Line.  The  kind 
of  cord  which  a  mason  uses 
for  his  plumb-lines  is 
splendid  for  flying  the 
Malay  kite.  If  you  can- 
not get  some  balls  of  this, 
be  certain  that  what  you 
do  get  can  be  relied  upon, 
because  it  is  provoking  to 
lose  a  kite  which  you  have 
taken  a  great  deal  of  pains 
in  making,  through  the 
breaking  of  the  flying  line. 
The  Box-Kite.  Of  the 
more  pretentious  kites,  none  is  as  popular  as  the  rec- 
tangular box-kite. 

Box-kites  may  be  purchased  ready-made  in  a  number  of 
sizes,  but  they  are  not  cheap,  and  it  will  pay  any  boy  to 
take  the  time  necessary  to  make  one.     While  their  con- 


cn 

hj 

x 

21 
O 

o 
h 

_i 
< 
o 

h 

01 

LU 
> 

CJ 


NAfL- 
Fig.  20 

Fig.  20.  —  Detail  of  Vertical  Stick. 

Fig.  2i. — Detail  of  Bow-Stick. 

Fig.  22.  —  Detail  of  End  of  Bow-Stick. 


HOME-MADE  KITES 


13 


struction  requires  considerable  more  work  than  the  single- 
plane  type  of  kite,  it  is  not  difficult. 

Figures  23  and  24  show  a  kite  of  scientifically  developed 
proportions.  Pine,  spruce,  and  whitewood  are  the  best 
materials  for 

The  Kite  Sticks,  though 
any  strong,  light-weight 
wood  of  straight  grain 
may  be  used  if  easier  to 
obtain.  If  you  live  near 
a  lumber  yard  or  planing- 
mill,  possibly  you  can  get 
strips  of  just  the  size  you 
require  from  the  waste 
heap,  for  the  mere  asking, 
or  for  a  few  cents  get  them 
ripped  out  of  a  board.  If 
not,  you  will  find  it  easy 
enough  to  cut  them  your- 
self with  a  sharp  rip-saw. 

The  Side  Frames.  Cut 
the  four  horizontal  sticks 
§  inch  thick  and  f  inch 
wide,  by  36  inches  long  (A,  Fig.  25),  and  the  four  up- 
right connecting  sticks  (B,  Fig.  25)  J  inch  thick,  \  inch 
wide,  and  10  inches  long.  Tack  the  upright  sticks  to  the 
horizontal  ones  6  inches  from  the  ends  of  the  latter,  as 
shown  in  Fig.   25,  using  slender  brads  for    the   purpose, 


Fig.  23.  —  Raising  the  Box-Kite. 


14 


HOME-MADE  TOYS  FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


and  clinching  the  projecting  ends.    In  fastening  these  sticks, 
be  careful  to  set  sticks  B  at  right  angles  to  sticks  A. 


Fig.  24.  —  The  Box-Kite. 


After  fastening  together  the  side-frame  sticks  as  shown 
in  Fig.  25,  lay  them  aside  until  you  have  prepared 


f—A 

t       ' 
1 

10" 

*  t r 

— B 

s-A 

B- 

3  6" 


Fig.  25.  —  Make  Two  Side  Frames  like  this. 

The  Covering  for  the  End  Cells.  A  light-weight  muslin 
or  tough  paper  should  be  used  for  this  material.  Cheese- 
cloth will  do  if  you  give  it  a  coat  of  thin  varnish  to  fill  up 


HOME-MADE  KITES 


15 


the  pores  and  make  it  air-tight,  after  it  has  been  put  on. 
The  light-weight  brown  wrapping-paper  now  so  commonly 
used  is  good  covering  material. 

The  cell  bands  for  the  kite  illustrated  should  be  10  inches 
wide  and  5  feet  9  inches  long.  If  of  cloth,  they  should  be 
hemmed  along  each  edge  to  prevent  raveling  and  to  make 
a  firm  edge.  If  of  paper,  the  edges  should  be  folded  over 
a  light  framing-cord  and  pasted.     Sew  together  the  ends  of 


Fig.  26.  —  Cross-Section  of  the  Box-Kite. 

the  cloth  bands,  or  paste  the  ends  of  the  paper  bands,  lap- 
ping them  so  the  measurement  around  the  inside  will  be 
exactly  5  feet  8  inches,  the  proper  measurement  around 
the  sticks  of  the  finished  kite. 

Assembling  the  Kite.  Slip  the  bands  over  the  side 
frames,  spread  the  frames  to  their  fullest  extent,  and  hold 
them  in  this  position  by  means  of  sticks  sprung  in  tem- 
porarily between  upright  sticks  B.  Then  measure  the 
proper  length  for  the  diagonal  braces  C  (Fig.  26).  These 
sticks  should  be  notched  at  their  ends  to  fit  over  the  sticks 


i6 


HOME-MADE  TOYS  FOR   GIRLS   AND   BOYS 


A,  as  shown  in  Fig.  27,  and  they  should  be  a  trifle  long  so 
they  will  be  slightly  bow-shaped  when  put  in  place.  In 
this  way  the  frames  will  keep  the  cloth  or  paper  bands 
stretched  tight. 

The  notched  ends  of  the  diagonals  should  be  lashed  with 
thread  to  keep  them  from  splitting.  Lashings  of  thread 
around  the  frame  sticks  A,  as  shown  in  Figs.  25  and  27, 
will  keep  the  ends  of  the  braces  from  slipping  away  from  the 

uprights  B,  which  is  the 
proper  position  for  them. 
Bind  the  braces  together  at 
their  centers  with  thread, 
as  shown  in  Figs.  24  and 
A^n/,/.#  26.       Coat    the    lashings 

with   glue  after   winding 
them,  and  the  thread  will 
hold  its  position  better. 
The  cloth  or  paper  bands  should  be  fastened  to  each  hori- 
zontal frame  stick  with  two  tacks  placed  near  the  edges  of 
the  bands. 
There  are  several  methods  of 

Attaching  the  Bridle,  but  that  shown  in  Fig.  24  is 
generally  considered  the  most  satisfactory.  Of  course,  the 
kite  is  flown  other  side  up,  with  the  bridle  underneath. 
The  three-point  attachment  has  cords  fastened  at  the 
two  outer  corners  of  one  cell,  and  a  third  cord  to  the  center 
of  the  outer  edge  of  the  other  cell ;  and  the  four-point 
attachment  has  cords  attached  at  the  four  outer  corners 


Detail  of  Diagonal  Braces. 


HOME-MADE  KITES 


17 


of  the  kite.  The  ends  of  the  bridle  should  be  brought 
together  and  tied  at  a  distance  of  about  3  feet  from  the 
kite.  It  is  a  good  plan  to  connect  the  ends  to  a  fancy- 
work  ring. 

A  Good  Hand  Kite-Reel  that  can  be  held  in  one  hand  and 
operated  by  the  other  is  shown  in  Fig.  28.  Get  a  J-lb. 
size  baking-powder  can  for  the  winding-spool,  locate  the 
center  of  the  cover  and  bottom  end,  and  with  a  can-opener 


Fig.  2 


A  Good  Hand  Kite-Reel. 


cut  a  hole  1  inch  in  diameter  through  each  (Fig.  29). 
Then  cut  two  wooden  disks  5  inches  in  diameter  for  the 
spool  flanges.  These  may  be  cut  out  of  thin  wood.  If  you 
do  not  wish  to  take  the  trouble  to  cut  them  round,  just 
saw  off  the  four  corners  diagonally,  making  the  pieces 
octagonal.  Bore  a  i-inch  hole  through  the  center  of 
each  piece.  Tack  the  can  cover  to  the  exact  center  of 
one  disk,  as  shown  in  Fig.  30,  and  the  can  to  the  exact 
center  of  the  other.  Then  fit  the  cover  on  the  can,  and 
glue  a  strip  of  cloth  or  heavy  paper  around  the  joint  to 


i8 


HOME-MADE  TOYS  FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


keep  the  cover  from  working  off,  and  the  spool  will  be 
completed. 

The  axle  upon  which  the    spool    turns    is   a    piece    of 
broom-handle  10  inches  or  so  in  length  (Fig.  30).     Bore 


Fig.  29 


Figs.  29  and  30.  —  Details  of  Hand  Kite- Reel. 

two  holes  through  it  in  the  positions  shown,  for  pins  to  keep 
the  spool  in  its  proper  place.  Wooden  pegs  can  be  cut  for 
pins.  For  a  winding  handle,  pivot  a  spool  on  the  right- 
hand  disk  by  means  of  a  nail  or  screw.  The  inner  flange 
of  the  spool  handle  may  be  cut  off  as  shown  in  Fig.  28. 


HOME-MADE  KITES 


19 


Both  hands  are  frequently  needed  to  haul  in  string 
quickly  enough  to  bring  a  kite  around  into  the  wind,  or  to 
handle  it  when  it  pulls  very  strong,  and  then  there  is  nothing 
to  do  but  drop  the  hand  reel  upon  the  ground,  unless  you 
have  an  assistant  to  give  it  to.  This  is  where  the  advan- 
tage of 

A  Body  Kite-Reel  comes  in.     With  it  strapped  about  the 

Fig.  33 


Fig.  31.— A  Body  Kite-Reel. 
Fig.  32.  —  Detail  of  Axle  Support. 
Fig.  33.  —  Detail  of  Crank. 


Fig.  31 


waist,  it  will  go  wherever  you  go,  and  always  be  within  easy 
reach.  Figure  31  shows  one  simple  to  make.  The  spool 
of  this  is  made  similar  to  that  of  the  hand  reel  shown  in 
Fig.  28.  If,  however,  you  wish  a  larger  winding-spool, 
you  can  use  a  larger  can  than  the  baking-powder  can  — 
a  tomato  can  or  syrup  can  —  and  increase  the  diameter  of 
the  wooden  flanges  accordingly.     Instead  of  the  spool  turn- 


20  HOME-MADE  TOYS  FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 

ing  upon  the  broom-handle  axle,  the  axle  turns  with  the 
spool,  so  the  spool  must  be  fastened  to  the  axle. 

The  axle  supports  A  (Figs.  31  and  32)  should  be  about 
7  inches  long,  4  inches  wide  at  the  wide  end,  and  2  inches 
wide  at  the  narrow  end.  Cut  the  holes  to  receive  the  axle 
ends  a  trifle  large  so  the  axle  will  turn  easily.  Cut  the 
connecting  crosspieces  B  of  the  right  length  so  there  will  be 
about  \  inch  between  the  ends  of  the  spool  and  supports  A. 

Cut  the  crank  stick  C  as  shown  in  Fig.  33,  bore  a  hole 
for  the  axle  end  to  fit  in,  bore  another  hole  in  the  edge  for 
a  set-screw  to  hold  the  stick  in  place  on  the  axle  end,  and 
pivot  a  spool  in  place  for  a  handle.  If  the  hole  in  the  spool 
is  too  large  for  the  head  of  the  nail  used  for  pivoting,  slip 
a  small  iron  or  leather  washer  over  the  nail. 

An  old  belt  or  shawl-strap  should  be  used  for  strapping 
the  kite-reel  to  your  body.  Fasten  this  to  the  ends  of  the 
axle  supports  A  by  nailing  the  strips  D  to  them  as  shown 
in  Fig.  32. 


CHAPTER   III 
A   HOME-MADE    MODEL   AEROPLANE 

Model  aeronautics  has  become  nearly  as  popular  as  kite 
flying,  and  girls  as  well  as  boys  have  taken  to  building 
these  unique  air  toys. 

The  model  aeroplane  requires  more  work  than  ordinary 
kite  construction.  It  also  requires  more  patience  and 
greater  accuracy,  because  each  part  of  the  little  aircraft 
must  be  made  just  so,  assembled  just  so,  and  "  tuned-up  " 
just  so,  to  produce  a  model  which  will  give  a  good  account 
of  itself.  Of  course  your  first  model  will  probably  not  be 
perfect.  But  if  you  do  your  work  correctly  and  carefully 
it  will  fly,  and  the  experience  you  have  acquired  will  make 
it  possible  to  turn  out  a  more  nearly  perfect  second  model. 

Many  types  of  model  aeroplanes  have  been  devised, 
but  those  of  the  simplest  form  of  construction  have  made 
the  best  showing.  The  majority  of  record-breaking  models 
have  been  of  one  type  —  a  triangular  framework,  equipped 
with  two  planes,  and  a  pair  of  propellers  operated  by  a 
pair  of  rubber-strand  motors.  A  most  successful  model  of 
this  type  is  shown  in  Fig.  34,  and  described  and  illustrated 
on  the  following  pages.  This  model  has  a  distance  record 
of  T620  feet  made  at  the  Aero  Club  of  Illinois'  aviation 


22 


HOME-MADE  TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


field  at  Cicero,  Chicago,  where  it  flew  16  feet  beyond  the 
fence  of  the  160  acre  field.  The  model  weighs  but  5 \ 
ounces,  has  9-inch  propellers  of  27  inch  pitch,  and  is  in 

every    essential    a 
speed  machine. 

The  first  part  of 
the  model  to  make 
is  the  triangular 

Fuselage,  or  motor 
base.  This  consists 
of  two  side  sticks, 
splines,  or  spars  {A, 
Fig.  35)  of  straight- 
grained  white  pine 
cut  to  the  dimen- 
sions marked  upon 
the  drawing,  with 
their  bow  ends  bev- 
eled off  for  a  dis- 
tance of  i\  inches, 
glued  together,  and 
bound  with  thread. 
The  stern  ends  have 
a  spread  of  8  inches, 
and  are  braced  at  that  distance  by  the  separator  B  (Fig.  35). 
This  separator  is  fastened  flatwise  between  sticks  A,  and 
its  edges  are  reduced  as  shown  in  the  small  section  draw- 
ing of  Fig.  37  so  they  will  offer  less  resistance  to  the  air. 


Fig.  34.  — Launching  a  Model  Aeroplane. 


A  HOME-MADE   MODEL   AEROPLANE 


n 


This  piece  is  fastened  between  sticks  A  with  brads.  Sepa- 
rators C,  D,  and  E  are  of  the  sizes  marked  in  Fig.  35,  and 
of  the  proper  length  to  fit  between  side  sticks  A  at  the 

____— — — -^ 


.4—  6i 


-«i- 


■i'«i" 


iS 


>-l2    STRANDS   OF55"x^"RUBBEF 


Fig.  35.  — Plan. 


Fin 

Elevator 


1 

Main 
Plane 

^Stays' 

t 
1 

Id 

1 
1 

si, 

7 

Main    Plane. 


IN     PLANE-,.  1 


Fig.  36.  —  Side  Elevation  (without  Rubber  Motor). 
Figs.  35  and  36. — Working-Drawings  of  Model  Aeroplane  Designed  and  Built 

by  Harry  Wells. 
This  Model  has  a  record  of  1620  feet  made  at  the  Aero  Club  of  Illinois'  Aviation  Field  at  Cicero, 

Chicago. 

places  indicated  on  the  drawing.  They  are  cut  oval- 
shaped,  as  shown  in  the  small  section  drawing  in  Fig.  37. 
Before  fastening  the  separators  in  position, 
The  Thrust  Bearings  for  the  propellers,  and  the  end 
plates  for  connecting  the  wire  stays,  must  be  prepared. 
Figure  38  shows  a  dimensioned  detail  of  the  thrust  bear- 
ings, and  Fig.  37  shows  how  they  are  bound  to  the  ends 
of  sticks  A  with  thread.     These  are  cut  out  of  brass,  bent 


24 


HOME-MADE  TOYS  FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


into  the  shape  shown,  and  have  a  hole  pierced  through  the 
folded  tip  for  the  propeller-shaft  to  run  through,  another 
through  one  end  for  the  brad  to  pass  through  that  pins 
stick  A  to  B,  and  another  through  the  other  end  to  fasten 
the  end  of  the  wire  stays  to.  The  small  detail  in  Fig.  37 
shows  the  end  plates  for  the  wire  stays.  These  are  made 
no  longer  than  is  necessary  for  the  connecting  holes  for  the 
wire-stay  ends.     Pierce  a  hole  through  the  center  of  each 


Fig.  39 


^_^===J===i'  /       GRUBBER  TUB 

r;:===^~t  Wl RE  RING 


Fig.  38 


Fig.  37 
Fig.  37.  —  Detail  of  Fuselage  and  Motor  of  the  Wells  Model. 
Fig.  38. — Detail  of  Thrust  Bearing,  Propeller-Shaft,  and  Connections. 
Fig.  39.  — Detail  of  Bow  Hook  and  how  Rubber  Motor  is  Connected  to  it. 


plate  for  the  brad  to  pass  through  which  fastens  sticks  A 
to  the  ends  of  the  separators.  The  plates  are  bound  to 
sticks  A  with  thread. 

The  Bow  Hooks  support  the  bow  ends  of  the  rubber 
motor,  and  are  made  upon  the  ends  of  a  piece  of  heavy 
piano-wire  bent  V-shaped  to  fit  over  the  ends  of  sticks  A 
(Fig.  39).  Bind  the  wire  to  the  sticks  with  thread,  coating 
the  thread  with  glue  to  make  it  hold  fast  (Fig.  37). 

The  Main  Plane  has  a  framework  built  as  shown  in  Fig. 
40,  with  the  front  or  entering-edge,  and  the  rear  or  following- 


A  HOME-MADE   MODEL  AEROPLANE  25 

edge,  made  of  sticks  of  white  pine  or  other  light-weight 
wood,  and  the  ribs  and  tips  on  the  ends  made  of  No.  16 
gauge  aluminum  wire.  The  ends  of  the  frame  sticks  are 
cut  away  on  their  outer  edge,  to  receive  the  ends  of  the  wire 
forming  the  tips,  and  the  ends  of  these  wires,  and  the  laps 
of  the  wire  ribs,  are  bound  in  position  with  thread,  and  the 
thread  then  coated  with  glue  to  hold  it  in  position. 

The  Elevator,  or  front  plane,  has  a  framework  made  as 
shown  in  Fig.  41.  Its  entering-edge  is  a  stick,  and  its 
following-edge,  ribs,  and  end  tips,  are  made  of  No.  16  guage 
aluminum  wire.  You  will  notice  by  Fig.  41  that  the 
center  ribs  cross  the  following-edge  of  the  frame  and  are 
bent  up  in  the  form  of  a  flat  loop.  This  loop  rests  against 
the  under  side  of  the  fuselage,  and  gives  the  elevator  its 
proper  angle  for  stability  (Fig.  36).  The  tips  are  bent  up 
to  add  stability. 

The  frames  of  the  main  plane  and  elevator  are  covered 
with  china-silk,  which  may  either  be  sewed  or  glued  in  place, 
and  this  is  given  a  thin  coat  of  shellac  to  make  it  air-tight 
and  taut.  The  covering  must  be  put  on  smoothly  to  re- 
duce to  a  minimum  what  is  known  as  skin  resistance  — 
the  resistance  that  the  plane  makes  to  the  air  while  passing 
through  it. 

The  main  plane  and  elevator  are  held  to  the  fuselage  by 
means  of  rubber-bands  slipped  beneath  them  and  over  the 
fuselage,  and  unlike  the  planes  of  the  majority  of  models, 
are  fastened  to  the  under  side  of  the  fuselage.  Figure  36 
shows  the  approximate  position  of  the  elevator.     That  of 


26 


HOME-MADE  TOYS  FOR   GIRLS   AND   BOYS 


the  main  plane  will  vary  under  different  air  conditions, 
sometimes  being  placed  over  the  separator  C,  and  at  other 
times  closer  to  separator  B  than  is  shown  in  Fig.  35. 
Therefore,  you  must  adjust  your  plane  and  elevator  — 
this  operation  is  known  as  tuning  — ■  to  suit  the  condition 
of  the  atmosphere,  until  you  find  the  positions  where  they 
will  give  the  machine  the  greatest  stability.     A  great  factor 


Fig.  41 


Fig.  42 


Fig.  40 

Fig.  40.  —  Detail  of  the  Main  Plane  Framework  of  the  Wells  Model. 
Fig.  41.  —  Detail  of  the  Elevator  Framework. 
Fig.  42.  —  Detail  of  Fin. 

in  the  successful  flight  of  a  model  aeroplane  lies  in  properly 
tuning  the  planes,  both  laterally  and  longitudinally,  and  of 
course  the  planes  must  balance  at  their  centers,  in  order 
to  make  the  machine  balance  properly. 

The  Fin  directly  over  the  center  of  the  elevator  (Figs.  34 
and  36)  is  provided  for  stability,  and  may  be  used  as  a 
rudder  by  turning  it  slightly  to  one  side  or  the  other.  It 
is  made  of  No.  34  gauge  sheet  aluminum,  cut  to  the  form 


A   HOME-MADE   MODEL  AEROPLANE 


27 


Glass  Bead 
Wire  shaft 


Fig.   43.— The  Wells 
Model  Propeller. 


shown  in  Fig.  42.  Its  vertical  edge  is  bent  around  a  piece 
of  heavy  wire,  as  shown  in  the  plan  detail  of  Fig.  42,  and 
the  lower  end  of  the  wire  is  fastened  upright  between  the 
bow  ends  of  sticks  A. 

The  Propellers  are  the  most  difficult 
part  of  the  model  aeroplane  to  make. 
They  must  be  very  accurately  cut,  and 
must  be  of  identical  size  and  pitch. 
The  pitch  of  a  propeller  is,  theoretically,  the 
distance  forward  that  it  advances  in  one  complete  revolution. 

Figure  43  shows  one  of  the  propellers  of  Harry  Wells' 
machine,  which  is  9  inches  in  length  and  has  a  27-inch 
pitch.     Figure  44  shows 

How  to  Prepare  the  Propellers.  The  pair  must  be  oppo- 
sites,  that  is,  one  must  be  of  right-hand  pitch  and  the 
other  of  left-hand  pitch,  or,  in  other  words,  the  upper  end 


rr^si 


* 


A         B  C  D  E  F 

Fig.  44.  —  How  to  Prepare  a  9-inch  Propeller. 

of  the  right-hand  pitch  propeller  turns  to  the  right,  and 
that  of  the  left-hand  pitch  propeller  turns  to  the  left,  when 
viewing  them  from  the  rear. 


28  HOME-MADE  TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 

Step  A  consists  in  properly  planing  up  a  straight-grained 
block  of  white  pine  i|  inches  thick,  2  inches  wide,  and 
9  inches  long,  with  its  sides  and  ends  straight  and  true,  for 

The  Propeller  Blank.  Draw  a  line  around  the  four  faces 
of  this  block  at  the  exact  center  of  the  length.  Then  on 
faces  C  and  D,  lay  off  a  distance  of  J  inch  on  the  center- 
line,  measuring  from  the  edge  of  face  B,  for  the  thickness 
of  the  propeller-hub,  and  draw  diagonal  lines  from  the  upper 
and  lower  left-hand  corners  of  faces  C  and  D  to  the  end 
of  the  hub  center-line  (Step  B).  Then  cut  away  the  por- 
tions outside  of  these  lines,  as  shown  in  Step  C.  Lay  out 
the  hub  upon  faces  A  and  B  of  the  block,  with  a  J-inch 
diameter,  and  bore  a  small  hole  through  the  center  to  receive 
the  propeller-shaft  (Step  C).  Draw  diagonals  from  the 
corners  to  the  center-line  of  the  hub  (Step  D) ;  then  cut 
away  the  wood  outside  of  these  lines  (Step  E). 

The  next  step  (F)  consists  in  laying  out  the  form  of  the 
propeller  blade  upon  all  four  sides  and  ends  of  the  block, 
and  Step  G  is  the  final  one  of  cutting  out  the  propeller, 
scooping  out  its  blades  concave  on  one  side,  and  carving 
them  convex  on  the  opposite  side.  A  very  sharp  knife 
must  be  used  for  cutting ;  and  the  work  must  be  done 
slowly  and  carefully,  because  the  least  slip  is  likely  to  ruin 
the  propeller.  The  entering-edge  of  each  blade  is  the  almost 
straight  edge,  and  should  be  cut  very  thin.  The  ends  of 
the  blades  should  also  be  cut  thin,  while  the  hub  should  be 
cut  away  as  much  as  can  safely  be  done  without  weaken- 
ing the  propeller. 


A   HOME-MADE   MODEL   AEROPLANE  29 

When  you  have  completed  cutting  the  propellers,  place 
them  at  their  centers  across  the  edge  of  a  knife-blade,  and 
if  they  do  not  balance  perfectly,  locate  the  trouble  and 
correct  it.  Finish  the  work  with  fine  emery-paper,  and 
then  shellac  it.  Some  boys  glue  silk  over  the  ends  of  their 
propeller  blades,  for  a  distance  of  J  inch  or  so,  to  reinforce 
them  and  make  them  less  likely  to  split. 

The  Propeller-Shafts  are  made  of  heavy  piano- wire,  bent 
into  a  hook  at  one  end  (Fig.  38)  to  receive  the  rubber 
strands  of  the  motor,  and  cut  of  the  right  length  to  extend 
through  the  hole  in  the  bearing,  through  a  glass  bead, 
through  the  propeller,  and  then  to  bend  over  the  side  of 
the  hub  (Figs.  37  and  38).  By  bending  over  the  end  of  the 
shaft  against  the  hub,  it  is  held  securely  in  place. 

The  Motors  consist  of  twelve  strands  of  |-inch  flat 
rubber,  each,  and  as  these  are  1  yard  in  length,  exactly  24 
yards  of  rubber  are  required.  The  rubber  is  not  connected 
direct  to  the  hooks  on  the  bow  and  propeller-shafts,  as  the 
wire  would  quickly  cut  through  the  strands.  Instead, 
small  rings  are  bent  out  of  wire,  with  pieces  of  small  rubber- 
tubing  slipped  over  the  wire,  and  the  ends  of  the  rubber 
strands  are  looped  through  these  rings  and  bound  in  place 
with  thread  (Fig.  39).  The  wire  rings  are  then  slipped 
on  and  off  the  hooks  quickly.  As  light  and  heat  cause 
rubber  to  deteriorate,  you  must  remove  the  motors  from 
the  machine  after  use,  pack  away  in  a  covered  box,  and 
keep  in  a  cool  place,  in  order  to  get  the  longest  life  possible 
out  of  the  rubber. 


3° 


HOME-MADE   TOYS   FOR   GIRLS   AND   BOYS 


It  has  been  found  that  rubber  motors  can  be  wound 
much  farther  by  lubricating  them  with  glycerine.  It  is 
only  necessary  to  put  a  few  drops  of  the  glycerine  upon  a 
clean  cloth,  and  rub  it  over  the  outside  strands ;  then  wind 


Fig.  47  Fig.  45  Fig-  40 

Fig.  45.  — A  Home-made  Motor  Winder. 
Fig.  46.  — The  Kind  of  Egg-Beater  to  Use. 
Fig.  47.  —  How  the  Motors  are  Connected  to  Winder  for  Winding. 

the  motors,  and  it  will  work  over  the  surface  of  the  inner 
strands  until  all  parts  are  covered. 

Of  course  the  rubber  motors  must  be  twisted  an  equal 
number  of  turns,  in  order  to  make  the  propellers  work  the 
same,  and  this  is  usually  done  with  an  ingenious  winder 
made  from  an  egg-beater,  which  winds  both  motors  simul- 
taneously. 


A   HOME-MADE   MODEL   AEROPLANE  31 

The  Home-made  Motor- Winder  shown  in  Fig.  45  is 
made  from  a  Dover  egg-beater  (Fig.  46).  To  convert  the 
egg-beater  into  a  winder,  it  is  necessary  to  cut  off  the  loop 
ends  and  the  center  pivot  wires  on  which  the  loops  turn. 
Then  bend  the  cut-off  ends  of  the  loops  into  hooks,  and 
punch  them  to  fit  over  the  pivot  wire  ends,  as  before  (Fig. 
45).  The  ends  of  the  pivot  wires  must  be  riveted  to  keep 
the  hooks  in  position. 

Figure  47  shows 

How  the  Egg-Beater  Winds  the  Motors.  While  an 
assistant  supports  the  model  by  the  propeller  end,  you 
remove  the  motor  rings  from  the  hooks  on  the  bow  of  the 
fuselage,  and  slip  them  on  to  the  hooks  of  the  egg-beater. 
Then  you  turn  the  crank  of  the  winder,  counting  the  turns 
as  you  do  so,  and  when  you  have  wound  the  motors  as 
far  as  you  wish,  slip  off  the  motor  rings,  and  slip  them  back 
on  to  the  bow  hooks  of  the  model  aeroplane.  Motors  of 
models  like  that  shown  in  this  chapter  are  wound  one- 
thousand  turns  or  more  for  each  flight. 

Wind  the  Motors  Slowly,  especially  after  the  first  row 
of  knots  begin,  as  it  puts  the  rubber  to  the  least  amount 
of  strain  by  doing  this.  Quick  winding  not  only  strains 
the  rubber  but  makes  the  knots  form  in  bunches,  and  un- 
even winding,  of  course,  produces  an  uneven  unwinding. 

The  propellers  must  be  held  after  the  motors  have  been 
wound,  to  keep  them  in  check.     Figure  34  shows 

The  Position  to  Take  for  Launching  a  Model  from  the 
hand.     The   machine   should   not  be   thrown  forward,  as 


32  HOME-MADE  TOYS  FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 

the  movement  would  cause  too  great  a  disturbance  of  the 
air,  resulting  in  the  machine  losing  its  stability,  and  prob- 
ably upsetting.  The  best  method  is  to  give  the  model  a 
slight  push  that  will  start  it  off  at  a  speed  a  trifle  under 
that  produced  by  its  propellers. 


CHAPTER   IV 

A    HOME  MADE    TOY    MOTOR-BOAT 

The  toy  motor-boat  shown  in  Figs.  48  and  49  is  pro- 
pelled by  a  tin  propeller  run  by  a  rubber-band  motor.     A 


Fig.  49.  — The  Completed  Motor-Boat. 

handful  of  rubber-bands  will  cost  only  a  few  cents,  and 
the  rest  of  the  working  material  can  be  picked  up  at  home. 

Prepare  the  Bottom  of 
the  Hull  out  of  a  piece  of 
wood  1  inch  thick,  making 
it  of  the  shape  and  dimen- 
sions shown  in  Fig.  51.  Be 
careful  to  curve  the  side 
edges  the  same.  Use  a  saw 
for  cutting  out  the  piece, 
then  smooth  up  the  edges 
with  a  plane  and  sandpaper.  The  stern  should  be  sawed 
off  on  a  bevel  as  shown  in  Fig.  52. 

33 


Fig.  50.  —  Stern,  with  Motor  in  Place. 


34 


HOME-MADE  TOYS  FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


The  Sides  of  the  hull  (B,  Figs.  52  and  53)  are  thin  strips 


2h  inches  wide. 


Nail  one  to  one  edge  of  the  bottom  block, 
then  saw  off  the 
bow  end  on  a  line 
with  the  bow  of  the 
bottom  block,  and 


— 2  o" 

Fig.  51.  —  Diagram  of  Hull. 


— *1  the  stern  end  on 
the  same  slant  as 
the  bevel  cut  on  the  stern  of  the  bottom  block.  With  one 
piece  in  position,  nail  on  the  second  side  and  trim  off  its 
ends.  If  you  have  any  difficulty  in  making  a  neat  joint 
between  the  bow 
ends  of  sides  B, 
take  a  piece  of  tin 
from  a  can,  bend  it 
around  the  bow,  and 
tack  it  in  place  as 
shown  in  Fig.  48. 
The  stern  piece  (C, 
Figs.  53  and  54) 
should  be  cut  next, 
to  fit  the  slanted 
ends  of  the  sides. 

The  Deck  (D)  ex- 
tends from  the  bow 

almost  to  the  center  of  the  boat.  Its  top  surface  should 
taper  in  its  length  and  curve  from  side  to  side.  The  piece 
may  be  whittled  or  planed  to  this  shape.  Fasten  it  with 
brads  to  the  top  edges  of  the  sides  of  the  boat. 


Fig.  53 


Figs.  52  and  53.  —  How  the  Hull,  Sides,  Stern  and 
Deck  Pieces  are  Assembled. 


Fig.  48. — Launching  the  Toy  Motor-Boat. 


A  HOME-MADE  TOY   MOTOR-BOAT  35 

To  Complete  the  Boat,  go  over  the  work  carefully,  trim 
off  all  projecting  edges,  drive  nail  heads  beneath  the  sur- 
faces, putty  nail  holes  and  cracks,  and  give  the  wood  two 
coats  of  paint  of  whatever  color  you  want  to  have  the 
motor-boat. 

The  Propeller  (£,  Fig.  54)  is  cut  from  the  side  of  a  tin 
can.  Cut  a  piece  3  inches  long  and  f  inch  wide,  round  its 
ends,  and  with  the  point  of  a  nail  pierce  a  hole  through  it 
each  side  of  the  center  of  the  length  of  the  piece  (Fig.  55). 
To  finish  the  propeller,  it  is  only  necessary  to  take  hold  of 
the  two  ends  and  twist  the  piece  into  the  shape  shown  in 
Fig.  56. 

The  Propeller-Shaft  requires  a  short  piece  of  wire  with 
one  end  bent  into  a  hook  (F,  Fig.  56).  Stick  the  straight 
end  of  this  shaft  through  one  hole  in  the  propeller,  and 
the  hooked  end  through  the  other  hole,  then  twist  the 
hooked  end  over  on  to  the  main  part  of  the  shaft,  as  shown 
in  Fig.  57.  Make  a  tight  twist  so  the  propeller  will  be 
held  perfectly  rigid  on  the  shaft. 

The  Bearing  Plate  G  (Figs.  54  and  58)  supports  the 
propeller.  Cut  it  out  of  a  piece  of  tin  ij  inches  wide  by 
3  inches  long,  bend  it  in  half  crosswise  to  give  it  stiffness, 
and  then  bend  it  lengthwise  to  the  angle  shown  so  it  will  fit 
over  the  slanted  stern  of  the  boat.  Punch  two  holes  through 
the  upper  end  for  nailing  the  plate  to  the  stern,  and  a  hole 
at  the  lower  end  for  the  propeller-shaft  to  run  through. 

For  a  Thrust  Bearing,  slip  a  couple  of  beads  over  the 
propeller-shaft,  between  the  propeller  and  bearing  plate 


36  HOME-MADE  TOYS  FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


1) 


B 


^^^^TTTT^, 


\ 


w^^^^^^^^^^^mzm. 


\U-E 


Fig.  54. — Longitudinal  Section  of  Assembled  Motor-Boat. 
Figs.  55-59.  — Details  of  Propeller. 
Fig.  60.  —  Rubber-Band  Motor. 


A  HOME-MADE  TOY   MOTOR-BOAT  37 

G.  Probably  you  can  find  glass  beads  in  your  mother's 
button  bag. 

After  slipping  the  beads  on  to  the  shaft,  and  sticking 
the  shaft  through  the  hole  in  bearing  plate  G,  bend  the 
end  of  the  shaft  into  a  hook ;  then  screw  a  small  screw- 
hook  into  the  bottom  of  the  hull,  at  the  bow  end  (/,  Fig. 
54),  and  you  will  be  ready  for 

The  Rubber-Band  Motor.  Rubber-bands  about  i| 
inches  in  length  are  best  for  the  purpose.  Loop  these 
together  end  to  end  (Fig.  60)  to  form  a  strand  that  will 
reach  from  hook  /  to  the  hook  on  the  propeller-shaft ; 
then  form  three  more  strands  of  this  same  length,  and  slip 
the  end  loops  of  all  four  strands  over  the  hooks. 

To  Wind  the  Motor,  give  the  propeller  about  one  hun- 
dred turns  with  your  finger;  then,  keep  hold  of  the  pro- 
peller until  you  launch  the  boat. 

There  are  many  ways  of  elaborating  upon  the  design  and 
construction  of  this  toy  motor-boat,  but,  having  given  the 
necessary  instructions  for  building  a  simple  model,  I  am 
going  to  leave  further  development  for  you  to  work  out. 
Here  is  an  opportunity  for  you  to  use  your  ingenuity. 
Devise  an  adjustable  rudder,  add  a  keel,  finish  off  the  cock- 
pit with  a  coaming,  install  a  headlight  made  from  a  pocket 
flashlight  —  in  fact,  see  just  how  complete  a  motor-boat 
model  you  can  build. 


CHAPTER   V 
HOME-MADE    TOY   WATER-MOTORS 

You  can  own  a  water-motor  like  the  one  shown  in  Fig. 
61,  because  its  construction  requires  nothing  but  easily 
obtained  materials. 

The   Case  of  this  water-motor  is  made  of  an  empty 


Fig.  6i. — A  Varnish-Can  Water-Motor  in  Operation. 

varnish  can  —  preferably  one  of  gallon  capacity.     Noth- 
ing better  could  be  desired.     The  tin  can  makes  a  light- 

38 


HOME-MADE   TOY   WATER-MOTORS 


39 


weight  compact  case ;  the  spout  in  the  top  is  in  just  the 
right  place  and  of  the  right  size  to  receive  the  water  power 
from  a  faucet ;  and  as  the  water  connections  can  be  made 
tight  there  is  no  possibility  of  water  splashing  on  to  the 
floor  — ■  a  big  argument  in  your  favor  when  seeking  per- 
mission to  use  the  motor 
in  the  bath-tub,  wash- 
basin, or  kitchen  sink. 

You  can  get  an  empty 
varnish  can  from  any 
painter,  or  at  a  paint 
store.  The  first  step  in 
converting  the  can  into 
the  motor  case  consists 
in  removing  the  bottom. 
You  will  find  this  sol- 
dered in  place,  in  all 
probability,  and  it  can 
be  removed  quickly  by 
holding  the  can  over  the 
flame  of  a  gas  burner 
until  the  solder  melts, 
when  a  few  taps  upon  the  edges  will  cause  the  piece  of 
tin  to  drop  off. 

The  Water-Motor  Wheel  is  shown  in  the  cross-sections 
of  the  water-motor  (Figs.  63  and  64),  and  Figs.  65  to  67 
show  its  details.  The  diameter  of  the  wheel  should  be 
about  I  inch  less  than  the  inside  width  of  the  can.     In 


Fig.  62. 


The  Completed  Varnish-Can 
Water-Motor. 


4o 


HOME-MADE  TOYS   FOR   GIRLS   AND   BOYS 


the  model  from  which  the  drawings  were  made,  this 
measurement  is  5J  inches.  Cut  the  two  side  pieces  of  the 
wheel  out  of  a  piece  of  cigar-box  wood,  and  bore  a  f-inch 
hole  through  the  center  of  each  for  the  wheel  axle.     Fasten 


CORK 


Fig.  63 

Figs.  63  and  64. 


Fig.  64 
Sections  through  Water-Motor  Case. 


a  spool  to  the  center  of  one  side  piece  for  a  pulley-wheel 
(Fig.  66). 

Prepare  Eight  Paddles  if  inches  wide  and  2 J  inches  long, 
out  of  cigar-box  wood.  Locate  the  positions  for  the  ends 
of  the  paddles,  upon  the  side  pieces,  by  drawing  a  hori- 
zontal line,  a  vertical  line,  and  two  diagonal  lines  at  angles 


HOME-MADE  TOY  'WATER-MOTORS 


41 


of  45  degrees,  through  their  centers.  This  will  simplify 
the  matter  of  spacing  the  paddles  equidistant  from  one 
another  (Fig.  67).  Use  brads  for  fastening  the  side  pieces 
to  the  paddle  ends.  Those  removed  from  the  cigar  boxes 
will  do. 

The  Wheel  Shaft  should  be  a  trifle  shorter  than  the 
inside  width  of  the  can,  and  enough  smaller  than  the 
j-inch  hole  in  the  wheel  side  pieces  so  the  wheel  will  turn 
freely.     Locate  the  centers  for  the  axle  upon  the  two  sides 


Fig.  65  Fig.  66 

Fig.  65.  — The  Completed  Water-Motor  Wheel. 
Figs.  66  and  67.  —  Details  of  Water-Motor  Wheel. 


Fig.  67 


of  the  can,  in  the  proper  position  so  there  will  be  the  same 
margin  above  and  at  the  ends  of  the  wheel.  Drive  a  nail 
through  each  side  of  the  can  into  the  axle  end. 

An  Outlet  for  the  water  after  it  has  passed  over  the 
wheel  paddles  must  be  provided,  and  the  best  way  is  to 
fasten  a  strip  to  two  opposite  sides  of  the  can  so  as  to 
raise  the  bottom  about  an  inch,  as  shown  in  Figs.  62,  63, 
and  64. 

For  a  Pulley-Belt  use  a  piece  of  heavy  cord.  Cut  a  slot 
through  the  front  of  the  can  for  the  belt  to  run  through, 


4? 


HoMH-MADE   TOYS   FOR   GIRLS   AND    BOYS 


and  make  this  slot  large  enough  so  the  cord  will  not  rub 
against  the  sides  (Fig.  63). 

Pulley- Wheels  for  attaining  different  speeds  can  be  made 

of  spools  of  various  sizes.     A  bicycle  wheel  with  the  tire 

removed,  mounted  in  a  frame,  is  excellent  for  a  large  wheel. 

Connecting  up  the  Water-Motor.      If  you  operate  the 

water-motor  in  the  kitchen  sink,  you  can  either  build  a 

platform  as  shown  in  Fig.  61, 
to  bring  the  spout  of  the  var- 
nish-can case  up  to  the  level 
of  the  faucet,  or  you  can  set 
the  water-motor  in  the  sink 
and  lead  a  piece  of  rubber 
tubing  from  the  spout  to  the 
faucet,  as  shown  in  Fig.  68. 
If  you  use  the  latter  arrange- 
ment, slip  the  lower  end  of  the 
rubber  tubing  over  a  short 
piece  of  glass,  brass,  or  tin 
tubing,  and  stick  the  short  tubing  through  a  hole  in  a  cork 
large  enough  to  fit  the  spout  of  the  varnish-can  case  (Fig. 
69).  If  you  raise  the  water-motor  high  enough  so  the 
faucet  will  set  down  into  the  spout,  you  can  cut  a  large 
enough  hole  for  the  faucet,  through  a  cork,  and  then  fit 
the  cork  in  the  spout  as  shown  in  Fig.  64. 

Another  Water-Motor.  The  little  water-motor  in  Fig. 
70  will  furnish  sufficient  power  to  operate  simple  mechani- 
cal toys. 


Rubber 


tubing 

CORK-tf 
BRASS  TUBING 


Fig.  68 

Figs.  G8-69.  —  How  to  Make  a 
Water-tight  Connection  between 
Faucet  and  Water-Motor. 


HOME-MADE   TOY   WATER-MOTORS 


43 


The  Water-Mo- 
tor Wheel.  Pro- 
cure two  baking- 
powder  can  covers 
for  the  ends  of  the 
water-motor  wheel 
(.4,  Fig.  72),  a 
cigar-box  out  of 
which  to  make  the 
wheel  paddles,  and 
a  stick  I  inch 
square  and  5 
inches  long  for  the 
wheel  axle  (B,  Fig. 
72). 

Cut  eight  pad- 
dles from  the 
cigar-box  wood  1 
inch  wide  and  5 
inches  long.  Take 
a  pair  of  these 
strips  and  fasten 
them  to  one  can 
cover,  in  line  with 
each  other,  and 
close  against  the 
sides  of  the  cover 
(C,  Fig.  73).  Fasten 


SLOT- 


rhe  Water-Motor 

Wheel. 


44 


HOME-MADE   TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


with  tacks  or  brads  driven  through  the  cover  into  the  ends 
of  the  strips.  Take  another  pair  of  strips  and  fasten  them 
to  the  same  cover,  in  a  similar  manner,  at  right  angles  to 
pair  C  (D,  Fig.  72).  Then  tack  the  pairs  of  strips  E  and 
F  to  the  cover  halfway  between  pairs  C  and  D.  With  the 
paddles  in  position,  locate  the  exact  center  of  the  end  of 

the  can  cover,  and 
"£;dl  _  j^v        drive     a     nail 

through  at  this 
point  into  the  end 
of  axle  B.  Slip 
the  free  ends  of  the 
paddles  into  the 
other  can  cover, 
and  carefully  drive 
tacks  or  brads 
through  the  cover 
into  them.  Drive 
a  nail  through  the 
center  of  the  cover 
into  the  end  of 
axle  B. 

The  Wheel  Sup- 
ports. Figure  74 
shows  the  supports  for  the  wheel.  Cut  the  end  pieces  G 
4  inches  wide  and  6  inches  high,  and  the  cross  strips  H 
if  inches  wide  and  5!  inches  long.  Nail  pieces  G  to  H,  as 
shown,  allowing  the  lower  ends  of  G  to  extend  i  inch  below 


Fig.  72 


jjp/IIIKi     j^ 


r    c  "iiimii 

I 

te/ifin 
lllliiiii' 

lilli«['l","c     i 

•Jill                        JM 

Figs.  72  and  73. 


Fig.  73 
Details  of  Water-Motor  Wheel. 


HOME-MADE   TOY  WATER-MOTORS 


45 


strips  H,  and  leaving  a  space  of  §  inch  between  strips  H, 
The  axle  holes  in  pieces  G  (Fig.  74)  should  be  located  in 
the  center  of  the  width  of  these  pieces,  and  halfway  be- 
tween their  tops  and  strips  H.  Bore  the  holes  with  a 
gimlet,  or  make  them  by  driving  a  large  nail  through  the 
pieces,  and  then 
withdrawing  it. 

To  Mount  the 
Wheel  upon  the  sup- 
ports, withdraw  the 
nails  driven  into  the 
ends  of  axle  B,  slip 
the  wheel  between 
uprights  G,  and 
drive  the  nails 
through  the  holes  in 
G  back  into  the 
holes  in  the  axle 
ends  (Fig.  71). 

The  Pulley  Wheel.  One  can  cover  should  be  con- 
verted into  a  pulley  by  winding  several  turns  of  string 
around  it,  near  each  edge,  leaving  a  groove  between 
the  string.  Coat  the  string  with  glue  to  make  it  stick 
fast  to  the  cover. 

The  Water-Motor  Case.  Figure  70  shows  how  the 
water-motor  case  is  constructed  by  fastening  boards  N, 
I,  J,  K,  L,  and  M  to  the  wheel  supports  G.  There  must 
be  a  slot  through  /  and  another  through  /,  for  the  string 


Fig.  74.  —  Support  for  Water-Motor  Wheel. 


46  HOME-MADE  TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 

belt  to  pass  through,  and  a  hole  through  K  for  the  intake 
of  water  from  a  faucet.  These  can  be  cut  out  of  the 
edges  of  the  boards,  as  shown,  before  they  are  nailed  in 
place.  Leave  an  opening  between  boards  TV  and  M,  and 
the  bottom  of  ends  G,  for  an  outlet  for  waste  water. 


CHAPTER   VI 

A   HOME-MADE    TOY   RAILWAY 

It  is  often  thought  that  a  toy  railway  is  beyond  a  boy's 
ingenuity  to  construct,  whereas,  in  reality,  it  is  one  of 
the  simplest  toys  he  can  make.  This  applies  to  the 
tracks,  stations,  and  cars  of  every  description,  all  of  which 
can  be  made  with  a  few  strips  of  wood,  some  spools,  nails, 
cardboard,  and  a  bottle  of  glue,  for  materials.  If  you 
have  passed  the  age  of  caring  for  such  toys  as  this,  you 
will,  no  doubt,  enjoy  the  making  of  one  r 

for  your  younger  brother,  or  for  one  of         / — — 
your  boy  relatives.  \Cr^Jie 

Figure  76  shows  a  railway  set  up  and 
in  running  order.  As  shown  in  the  illus- 
tration, /  \    :Hn 

The  Trolley-Line,  or  overhead  cable,  runs 
around  the  wheels  of  two  supports,  one  at 
either  end  of  the  track.  Prepare  four 
pieces  of  wood  the  shape  and  size  of  that 


shown  m  Fig.  75  for  the  uprights  of  these   ■*        4         ^ 

Fig.  75.  —  Upright. 

supports,    and    make    two    wheels    three 

inches  in  diameter.     The  wheels  may  be  marked  out  with 

a   home-made    compass  —  a   pencil    tied    to    the    end    of 

47 


48 


HOME-MADE   TOYS   FOR   GIRLS   AND   BOYS 


a  piece  of  string,  if  you  haven't  a  compass.  When 
the  wheels  have  been  cut  out,  place  them  in  your  bench- 
vise,   one    at    a    time,   and    with   a   file    make    a   groove 


Fig.   76.  —  The  Toy  Railway 

around  the  edge  as  shown  at  C,  Fig.  77.  Bore  a  three- 
eighths-inch  hole  through  each  upright  at  F,  Fig.  75, 
and   another   through    the   center  of   each  wheel.     Now 

fasten  two  of  the  uprights 

six    inches    apart    upon    a 

block  of  wood,  as  shown  at 

A  and  B,  Fig.  77.     Whittle 

a  shaft  to  fit  loosely  in  the 

holes  of  the  uprights,  and, 

after  slipping  it  into  them, 

fasten   one    of   the   wheels 

upon  one  end  and  a  small 

spool  upon  the  other  (see 

C  and  D  in  Fig.  77).     A  weight  of  some  sort  should  be 

fastened  to  the  base,  as   shown  at  E.     The  uprights  for 

the   other   support   should    be    similarly   mounted   upon 


Fig.  77.  —  Support  for  Trolley-Line. 


A  HOME-MADE   TOY  RAILWAY  49 

another  block  of  wood.  Fasten  the  remaining  wheel  to  an 
axle  run  through  the  holes  in  the  uprights,  and,  as  it  is 
unnecessary  to  have  a  spool  upon  the  other  end  of  the 


in  Operation. 

axle,  cut  it  off  short  and  drive  a  nail  through  it  to  prevent 
it  from  slipping  through  the  holes.  Having  thus  prepared 
the  supports,  place  them  as  far  apart  as  you  wish  to 
extend  the  railway,  and  run  a  cord  around  the  two  wheels 
and  tie  it.  Then  set  the  supports  a  little  farther  apart, 
if  necessary,  to  tighten  the  cord.  Run  another  cord  from 
spool  D  to 

A  Water-Motor,  steam  engine,  or  whatever  power  you 
can  get  with  which  to  operate  the  railway.  A  bicycle 
inverted  with  the  tire  removed  from  its  rear  wheel  has 
been  used  satisfactorily,  as  has  also  a  sewing-machine 
with  the  belt  slipped  off  and  the  cord  from  the  spool  put 
in  its  place. 

A  good  substitute  for  the  tin  tracks  ordinarily  sold  in 
shops  for  toy  railways  will  be  found  in  those  shown  in 
Fig.  78.     These 


5° 


HOME-MADE   TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND    BOYS 


Tracks  consist  of  quarter-inch  strips  mounted  upon 
pieces  of  cardboard.  Make  a  small  gimlet-hole  in  one 
end  of  each  stick,  and  drive  a  short  finishing  nail  in  the 
opposite  end  (see  Fig.  78).     Cut  the  cardboard  strips  the 


■  Nail.  Dowel. 


Fig.  78.  — The  Tracks. 

length  of  the  sticks,  and  tack  them  to  the  sticks  as  shown 
in  the  illustration.  If  inch  and  one-half  spools  are  used 
for  the  car  wheels,  the  inside  gauge  of  the  tracks  should 
be  an  inch  and  three-quarters.  By  lapping  the  card- 
board strips  over  the  ends  of  the  sticks,  and  the  sticks 
over  the  ends  of  the  cardboard  strips,  and  placing  the  nail 
dowels  in  the  ends  of  the  sticks  as  in  the  drawing,  a  strong 
track  is  formed  when  the  pieces  are  fitted  together.  This 
may  be  extended  to  any  desired  length  by  adding  more 
sections  to  it. 

The  Cars  for  this  railway  will  have  their   trucks  con- 
structed alike,  and  it  is  a  simple  matter  to  transform  a 


~P^ 


-** & 


1 


& 


^ 


Fig.   7Q.  — A  Top  View  of  Car  Truck. 

car  from  one  style  into  another.     Figure  79  shows  a  top 
view  of  a  truck.     For  the  bed  of  this  cut  a  three-eighths- 


A   HOME-MADE   TOY   RAILWAY 


51 


inch  board   twelve  inches  long  by  two  and  one-quarter 

inches  wide,  and,  after  rounding  the  ends  as  shown  in  the 

drawing,  cut  a  mortise  at  A  and  B  two  and  three-eighths 

inches  from  either  end.     Procure  two  one 

and  one-half  inch  spools  for  wheels,  and 

drive  a  wooden  peg  through  the  hole  in 

each,  cutting  off  the  ends  so  they  project 

a  little  beyond  the  hole,  as  shown  in  Fig. 

80.     Then  bore  four  holes  in  the  edges  of 

the  truck-bed  with  a  gimlet  at  C,  D,  E, 

and  F  (see  drawing),  and,  after  setting  the 

spools  in  mortises  A  and  B,  pivot  them  in 

place  with  small  finishing  nails  driven  into   the  wooden 

pegs.     These  nails  should  fit  loosely  in  the  gimlet  holes. 

In   order   to   drive   them   into   the   exact    centers   of    the 

spools,  it  is  best  to  locate  these  points  upon  the  ends  of 


Fig.  80.  —  Spool 
Wheels. 


V 


Brass  Rtog 


/K 


fyPeg 


Fig. 


#2Z> 


Fig.  81.  —The  Completed  Car  Truck. 

the  pegs  before  placing  the  spools  in  the  frame.  A  quarter- 
inch  hole  should  be  bored  in  the  top  of  the  truck-bed  at  G 
and  //  (Fig.  79)  in  which  to  fasten  the  two  uprights  /  and 
/  (see  Fig.  81).     Make  the  uprights  four  inches  long  and 


52  HOME-MADE   TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 

whittle  a  peg  upon  the  lower  ends  to  fit  holes  G  and 
H  (see  Fig.  82).  Bore  a  hole  with  a  gimlet  in  the  top  of 
each  and  run  a  piece  of  heavy  wire  from  one  to  the  other, 
bending  it  as  shown  in  Fig.  81.  Fasten  K  between  / 
and  /,  as  shown.  Place  a  small  brass  ring  upon  the  wire 
before  you  fasten  it  in  place.  A  small  hook  should  be 
screwed  into  one  end  of  the  truck  and  a  screw-eye  into 
the  other  end,  for  couplings,  should  you  wish  to  hitch  two 
or  more  cars  together. 

A  Gondola  Car,  such  as  shown  in  Fig.  83,  should  have 
its  truck  made  similar  to  Fig.  79,  with  the  exception  that 


H.&E.C.R.B. 


Fig.  83. — A  Gondola  Car. 

it  should  be  two  inches  shorter,  in  order  that  cigar-box 
strips  can  be  used  for  the  side  pieces.  Cut  the  strips  an 
inch  and  one-half  high  and  fasten  them  to  the  bed  of  the 
car  with  brads.     This  car  may  be  used  as  a  trailer. 

The  car  shown  in  Fig.  81  is  a  rather  crude  affair,  but 
with  a  little  more  work  may  be  transformed  into  a  better 
looking  car  — 

A  Street  Car  such  as  is  shown  in  Figs.  84  and  85  being 
an  example  of  what  can  be  made.  The  sides,  ends,  and 
roof  of  this  car  are  made  of  cardboard,  the  patterns  for 


A   HOME-MADE   TOY   RAILWAY 


53 


the  cutting  of  which  are  shown  on  page  55.  Figure  86 
shows  a  cross-section  taken  through  the  center  of  the  car. 
The  two  side  pieces  A  should  be  prepared  first,  as  shown 
in  Fig.  87.  With  a  ruler  and  lead-pencil  draw  in  the 
windows  about  as  shown  in  the  drawing,  using  double  lines 
to  indicate  the  sash.  Then,  with  a  sharp  knife,  cut  out 
the  center  of  each  just  inside  of  the  inner  line.  These 
windows  may  be  left  open  or  may  be  covered  on  the  in- 
side with  tissue-paper.     If  tissue-paper  is  used,  oil  it  to 


r 


anunnnn 


cook  •  City  •  Raolwa--.  •  C ; 


Fig.  84.  —  Side  View. 


Fig.  85.  — End  View. 


make  it  more  transparent.  When  the  two  sides  have 
been  prepared,  bend  each  along  the  dotted  lines  (see  Fig. 
87)  and  tack  one  to  each  side  of  your  car  truck  as  shown 
in  Fig.  86.  When  properly  bent,  the  distance  between 
the  upper  part  of  the  sides  should  be  two  and  three-quarters 
inches.  Cut  the  two  inner  ends  of  the  car  the  shape  of 
Fig.  88,  using  a  compass  with  a  radius  of  two  and  one-half 
inches  with  which  to  describe  the  curve  at  the  top.  Draw 
in  the  panels  and  sash  lines  as  you  did  those  upon  the 
side  pieces,  being  careful  to  get  them  on  the  same  level, 


54  HOME-MADE   TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 

and  cut  out  the  door  and  window  openings.  Fasten 
these  end  pieces  between  the  sides  with  glue,  and  also 
tack  them  to  the  uprights  of  the  car  (/  and  /,  Fig.  81), 
which  will  come  just  inside  of  them.  The  roof  is  made 
in  two  sections  (B  and  C,  Fig.  86).  For  B  cut  a  piece  of 
cardboard  twelve  and  one-quarter  by  three  and  three- 
quarter  inches  (Fig.  89),  draw  the  curved  end  with  a  com- 
pass, using  the  radius  shown  on  the  drawing,  and  slit  the 
corners  as  indicated  by  the  dotted  lines.  When  this 
piece  has  thus  been  prepared,  remove  the  wire  from  the 
top  of  the  truck  (see  Fig.  81).  Bend  the  cardboard  over 
the  sides  and  ends  of  the  car,  and  lap  corners  D  and  E 
over  F  and  G,  and  H  and  /  over  /  and  K,  tacking  them 
with  thread  to  hold  them  in  place.  To  fasten  this  part 
of  the  roof  to  the  top  of  the  car,  cut  a  number  of  small 
strips  of  linen,  and  glue  them  to  the  under  side  of  the  roof 
and  to  the  inside  face  of  the  sides  and  ends  of  the  car 
(see  Fig.  86).  The  upper  portion  of  the  roof  C  should  be 
made  out  of  a  piece  of  cardboard  bent  into  the  shape  of 
Fig.  90,  and  cut  at  the  ends  so  the  upper  portion  of  C 
projects  a  little  beyond  its  sides.  Draw  the  ventilation 
lights  upon  the  sides  of  C  as  shown  on  the  drawings,  and 
then  fasten  the  piece  upon  the  top  of  B  with  strips  of 
linen  in  the  same  manner  as  you  fastened  B  in  place. 
C  should  now  have  the  same  curve  to  its  top  as  B.  Cut 
and  glue  a  piece  of  cardboard  in  each  end  of  C  to  complete 
the  roof.  The  shape  of  this  piece  is  shown  in  Fig.  91. 
The  outer  ends  of  the  car  should  be  made  as  shown  in 


Fig.  91 


11% 


Fig.  86 


H*    B 

CO 


Fig. 


•poioo 

T 


Cat 


V 


ii 


Fig.  90 


nnnnnnn 


y. 


bend 


tiered 


Fig.  87 


■3* 


1BOYV1LLE  1 

I  I 

Fig.  94 


C 


0 


F 


2| 


Fig.  93  Fig.  92  Fig.  88 

Figs.  86-94.  —  Details  of  Toy  Street  Car. 

55 


56  HOME-MADE   TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 

Fig.  92,  and  tacked  around  the  ends  of  the  wooden  truck 
platform,  and  also  fastened  to  the  under  side  of  the  roof 
with  strips  of  linen.  The  window  openings  may  be  cut 
in  each  end,  but  it  will  make  a  stronger  car  if  they  are 
simply  drawn  upon  it.  Cut  four  cardboard  steps  similar 
to  Fig.  93  and  tack  them  to  the  sides  of  the  front  and  rear 
platforms.  When  the  car  has  been  put  together,  replace 
the  wire  in  the  tops  of  uprights  /  and  J  (Fig.  81),  run- 
ning the  ends  through  the  roof  (see  Fig.  84).  Paint  the 
sides  and  ends  of  the  car  yellow  with  brown  trimmings, 
and  paint  the  roof  a  light  gray.  Water  colors  can  be  used 
for  the  purpose.  Letter  the  name  of  your  car-line  upon 
the  sides  and  the  number  of  the  car  upon  each  end  and 
side.  The  route  should  be  lettered  upon  strips  of  card- 
board with  pins  run  through  them  as  shown  in  Fig.  94, 
these  strips  to  stick  in  the  roof  of  the  car  (see  Figs.  84 
and  85). 

Having  seen  how  the  car  is  made,  you  will  find  it  a 
simple  matter  to  make  designs  for 

Other  Cars,  using  the  same  scheme  for  the  trucks,  and 
altering  the  patterns  for  the  sides,  ends,  and  roof,  to  suit 
the  design. 

Nothing  has,  as  yet,  been  said  about  the 

Operation  of  the  Railway,  and  though  Fig.  76  probably 
shows  sufficiently  clear  how  it  is  run,  a  few  words  may 
be  helpful.  The  car  or  cars  are  placed  between  the  wooden 
tracks,  and  the  trolley  (or  cord  attached  to  the  ring  on 
top  of  the  car)  is  tied  to  the  trolley-line  as  in  the  illus- 


A  HOME-MADE  TOY  RAILWAY 


57 


tration.  Upon  starting  your  engine,  water-motor,  or 
whatever  motive-power  you  have,  the  car  will  run  from 
one  end  of  the  track  to  the  other.  When  it  has  reached  the 
support  of  the  trolley-line,  it  will  stop  long  enough  for 
the  cord  trolley  to  pass  around  the  wooden  wheel,  and 
then  run  in  the  opposite  direction  until  the  other  support 
is  reached.  It  will  thus  be  seen  that  the  trolley  hangs  to 
the  upper  part  of  the  cable,  or  trolley-line,  in  running 
one  way,  and  to  the  lower  part  on  the  return  run.     In 


Fig.  95.  — The  Railway  Depot. 

changing  the  direction  of  the  run,  the  ring  to  which  the 
trolley  is  attached  slides  to  the  other  end  of  the  car. 

A  Station  such  as  is  illustrated  in  Fig.  95  is  made  out 
of  cardboard  and  mounted  upon  a  seven-eighths-inch 
board  large  enough  to  form  a  railway  platform.  After 
cutting  out  the  side  and  end  pieces,  with  door  and  win- 
dow openings  placed  as  shown  in  the  illustration,  fasten 
them  together  with  strips  of  linen  glued  in  the  corners. 
Make  the  roof  low  and  extend  it  over  the  platform  upon 
each  side  and  over  the  gable-ends,  as  shown  in  the  illus- 
tration. Paint  the  sides  of  the  depot  the  regulation 
depot  red,  and  the  roof  a  shingle  or  slate  color.     Paint 


58  HOME-MADE  TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 

the  door  and  window-sash  black,  letter  the  name  of  the 
station  upon  the  gable-ends,  and  with  a  ruler  and  lead- 
pencil  rule  off  the  boards  upon  the  sides,  and  the  slate 
or  shingles  upon  the  roof.  As  this  is  a  typical  railway 
station,  two  may  be  made  of  the  same  pattern,  one  for 
either  end  of  your  car  line. 


CHAPTER   VII 
HOME-MADE   TOY   ELEVATORS 

The  elevator  shown  in  Fig.  96  is  a  unique  mechanical  toy 
well  worth  one's  making.  Release  the  little  car  at  the  top 
floor,  and  it  will  descend  to  the  ground  floor,  and  then 
return  to  the  starting  point,  without  you  having  to  touch 
it  a  second  time.  A  magical  elevator?  Perhaps  so.  A 
little  mechanical  device  performs  the  trick. 

The  same  plan  may  be  followed  for  installing  the  doll- 
house  elevator  in  Chapter  XIII,  but  the  more  stories  there 
are  the  more  fun  there  is  in  operating  the  elevator.  This  is 
why  I  have  adapted  the  scheme  to 

A  Toy  Office  Building.  Six  stories  are  shown  in  Fig.  96, 
but  you  can  make  a  modern  sky-scraper  with  as  many 
stories  as  you  like.  A  packing-case  3  feet  6  inches  long, 
stood  on  end,  was  used  for  the  model.  Another  box  or  two 
can  be  added  to  the  top  for  additional  stories.  Besides  the 
box,  or  boxes,  get  enough  box  boards  for  floors  and  parti- 
tions. 

Make  the  Floors  in  two  pieces  (A  and  B,  Fig.  98),  so  the 
opening  for  the  elevator  shaft  can  be  cut  out  of  the  end  of 
one  piece  in  the  manner  shown.  This  opening  should  be 
about  5  inches  square.     Mark  out  and  cut  the  boards  for  all 

59 


6o 


HOME-MADE  TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


of  the  floors  at  one  time,  and  be  careful  to  get  the  shaft 
opening  the  same  in  each  floor.     Cut  the  notch  C  in  board 

A  about  i  inch  square. 
Fasten  the  floor 
boards  in  place  with 
nails  driven  through 
the  sides  of  the  box. 
The  Partitions,  a 
pattern  for  which  is 
shown  in  Fig.  99,  can 
be  made  quicker  by 
omitting  the  doorway, 
but  this  is  easy  to  cut 
by  sawing  along  the 
sides  and  then  split- 
ting out  the  piece  be- 
tween the  saw  cuts. 

The  Elevator  Car 
should  be  built  up  of 
cigar-box  wood,  as 
shown  in  Figs.  101  and 
102.  The  front  portion 
(D)  should  be  about  3 
inches  wide,  2\  inches 
deep,  and  4  inches  high, 
and   the  rear  portion 


Fig.  96.— A  Toy  Office  Building  with  Elevator. 


(E)  should  be  of  the  same  width,  2  inches  deep,  and  2\ 
inches  high.     Fasten  these  upon  the  base  piece  F  as  shown. 


HOME-MADE   TOY  ELEVATORS  61 

The  Elevator  Guides.  Bore  the  holes  G  through  the 
top  and  bottom  of  the  car,  close  to  the  sides,  for  guide 
wires  H  to  run  through  (Figs.  101  and  102).  These  holes 
may  be  bored  with  a  screw-eye  if  you  haven't  a  gimlet  or 
drill.  Bell-wire,  or  almost  any  wire  that  you  have  on 
hand,  will  do  for  the  guides.  Fasten  two  screw-eyes  into 
the  under  side  of  the  top  of  the  shaft,  the  same  distance 
apart  as  holes  G,  and  in  the  proper  position  so  they  will 
come  exactly  over  them  (/,  Fig.  100).  Use  the  car  for 
determining  these  measurements.  Then  bore  two  holes 
through  the  bottom  of  the  shaft  directly  below  the  screw- 
eyes  (/,  Fig.  100).  Attach  the  wire  to  one  screw-eye,  run 
it  down  through  holes  G  in  the  car,  through  one  of  the  holes 
/,  then  across  to  and  up  through  the  other  hole  /,  up 
through  the  other  set  of  holes  G  in  the  car,  and  attach  to 
the  second  screw-eye  /. 

The  Cables.  The  elevator  is  lifted  by  means  of  cord  L 
(Figs.  97  and  101).  Fasten  this  cord  to  a  tack  driven  into 
the  top  of  the  car,  then  run  it  up  and  over  spool  M  (Figs. 
97  and  101),  over  spool  A7  (Fig.  97),  and  tie  to  weight  K, 

The  Counter-balance.  A  bottlex  filled  with  sand  to 
make  it  weigh  more  than  twice  as  much  as  the  car,  should 
be  used  for  this.  Screw  a  small  screw-eye  into  the  cork 
to  tie  the  cord  to. 

The  counter-balance  runs  up  and  down  in 

The  Smoke-Stack,  which  is  fastened  to  the  back  of  the 
building  (Fig.  97).  Make  the  stack  of  cardboard  mailing- 
tubes,  joining  them  end  to  end  with  bands  of  paper  pasted 


62 


HOME-MADE  TOYS  FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


Top 

VlEW-OF 

Stack 


around  them.  Fasten  the 
stack  to  the  back  of  the 
building  with  wire  straps, 
and  brace  the  top  as 
shown  in  Fig.  96,  but 
leave  it  unattached  until 
you  have  adjusted 

The  Overhead  Pulleys, 
or  sheaves.  These  are 
spools.  You  will  see  by 
looking  at  Fig.  100  that 
spool  M  turns  on  the  axle 
O,  and  the  ends  of  this 
axle  are  cut  to  fit  snugly 
in  screw-eyes  /. 

Fasten  pulley  spool  N  in 
the  smoke-stack  by  means 
of  a  wooden  axle  pushed 
through  holes  pierced  in 
the  side  of  the  stack,  as  is 
shown  in  the  small  draw- 
ing above,  Fig.  97.  Bore 
a  hole  through  the  back 
of  the  building  for  the 
cable  cord  L  to  run 
through  (P,  Figs.  97  and 
100),  and  cut  another 
through  the  smoke-stack. 


Fig.  97.  — Section  through  Elevator  Shaft. 


HOME-MADE   TOY   ELEVATORS  63 

How  the  Car  Operates.  When  the  weight  and  cord 
have  been  adjusted  and  the  smoke-stack  erected,  the  ele- 
vator will  run  from  the  ground  floor  up  to  the  roof  of  its 
own  accord,  because  the  counter-balance  is  much  heavier 
than  the  car.  To  make  it  descend  it  is  necessary  to  add 
weight  to  the  car,  to  make  it  enough  heavier  than  the 
counter-balance  so  it  will  drop  of  its  own  accord.  This  is 
done  with 

Ballast  consisting  of  a  bottle  of  sand  or  salt  of  twice 
the  combined  weight  of  counter-balance  K  and  the  car. 
After  filling  the  bottle,  cork  it  up,  and  screw  a  screw-eye 
into    the    cork.      Then 
screw   the   eye    of    a 
2-inch  hook-and-eye 
into    the    roof    of    the 
building,   directly   over 

the  center  of  box  E  of  the  elevator  (R,  Figs.  97  and  101), 
and  attach  one  end  of  a  rubber-band  to  the  hook  and  tack 
the  other  end  to  the  top  of  the  elevator-shaft  (Fig.  101). 

With  the  hook  and  rubber-band  properly  adjusted,  this 
is  what  happens  when  the  car  ascends  to  the  top  of  the 
shaft.  The  bottom  of  the  rear  portion  of  the  car  strikes 
bottle  Q,  lifts  it  enough  to  release  the  end  of  the  hook  (R), 
and  the  rubber-band  springs  the  hook  out  of  the  way 
(Fig.  97).  The  bottle  remains  upon  the  rear  portion  of 
the  car,  and  its  weight  carries  the  car  to  the  bottom  of  the 
shaft. 

To  Make  the  Car  Rise  to  the  top  of  the  shaft  again,  re- 


A: 


Fig.  98.  — Floors.  Fig.  99. —Partitions. 


\  Na£/>4?JV 

\ 

1 

ft 

y' 

\ 

\ 

Q 

1 

^ 

h 

--* 

fe 

-H 

/j^ 

/^ 

% 

RUBBER-BANDi 


/Screw-eye  (i) 

f  /SPOOL  (M) 


^Screw-eye 
CD 

/WIRE 
VGUIDES(H) 


Fig.  102 


Fig.  ioo.  —  Front  View  of  Elevator  Shaft. 
Figs,  ioi  and  102.  —  Elevator  Car  Details. 


s- 


HOME-MADE  TOY    ELEVATORS  65 

move  bottle  Q.  Replace  the  bottle  upon  the  end  of  hook 
R,  and  it  will  be  in  position  for  the  next  trip  downwards. 
Cut  the  holes  Y  and  Z  (Fig.  100)  through  the  out- 
side wall  of  the  shaft  for  hand  holes  through  which 
to  reach  bottle  Q  and  hook  R. 
Figures  97,  100,  and  103  show 
A  Simple  Control  for  stopping  the  car  at  the 
different  floor  levels.  Stick  5  may  be  a  piece  of 
broom-handle,  curtain-pole,  or  flagstaff.  Bore  a 
hole  through  the  bottom  of  the  shaft,  directly  be- 
low holes  C  in  the  floors  (T,  Fig.  100),  and  slip 
the  stick  through  hole  T  and  into  slots  C.  Then 
locate  on  one  side  of  stick  5  points  just  below 
the  under  face  of  each  floor,  and  upon  the  opposite 
side  locate  points  just  above  where  the  back  edge 
of  the  elevator  will  come  when  the  car  is  raised  to 
each  floor  level  (Fig.  97).  Remove  the  stick,  and 
drill  or  bore  a  small  hole  at  each  point  marked; 
then  replace  it,  nail  a  small 
block  (U,  Fig.  100)  across  the 
top  end  to  hold  it  in  place,  and 
drive  a  nail,  with  its  head  filed 

Fig.  103.— Detail  of  Brake  and    off,  into  each  of  the  holes. 

Controlling  Levers.  ^^  ^  s  ^   tumed  tQ   ^ 

position  shown  in  Fig.  97,  while  the  car  is  going  down, 
the  first  nail  below  the  car  will  project  beneath  it  and 
bring  it  to  a  stop;  and  if  the  stick  is  turned  in  the 
opposite  direction  while  the   elevator   is   going   up,    the 


66 


HOME-MADE   TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


first  nail  above  the  car  will  project  over  the  back  edge 

of    portion     E    and 


^j# 

bring   the    car    to    a 

f^o     5^<^Z^f[ 

?^K^ 

^ 

1         stop. 

i^PM 

Two  Levers  oper- 

1 W 

S[u 

ate  the    brakes    (IF, 

Sri 

ll  p 

u 

Figs.    97    and    100). 

i 

*  ii 

i 

N 

iff 

*^H[  0j 

Cut    these    of    the 
shape  shown  in  Fig. 
103,   and  screw   one 
to  each  side  wall. 
Then    tack    a    piece 
of  cord    to    stick  S, 

I 

wrap  the  ends  of  the 

ill 

cord     once     around, 

slip     them     through 

screw-eyes  V  screwed 

1       : 

into   the   side   walls, 
and    tie    to    tacks 
driven  into  levers  W. 
One  series  of  brakes 
can  now   be   set  by 

1 
lull 

ill  ■«//«».  ! 

1 

pulling  forward  one 

lever,  and  the  other 

Fig.  104.  — An  Outdoor  Elevator. 

^2fV*«'-  series  by  pulling  for- 

ward the  other  lever. 
By  driving  a   nail 

into 

stick  S 

at  X  (Fig 

.  100), 

an 

Ld  a  nail  into  the  bottom  of 

HOME-MADE   TOY   ELEVATORS 


67 


the  shaft,  each  side  of  stick  S,  the  levers  will  turn  the  stick 
just  far  enough  in  either  direction  to  bring  the  brakes  into 
operation. 

If  there  is  a  kitchen  porch  to  your  house,   construct 

The  Outdoor  Ele- 
vator shown  in  Fig. 
104  to  run  from  the 
ground  up  to  that 
porch.  If  you  live 
in  an  upper  story  of 
an  apartment  build- 
ing, your  elevator 
can  be  made  to  run 
to  a  greater  height, 
which,  of  course,  will 
make  more  fun. 

It  will  save  con- 
siderable work  to  use 
the  porch,  because 
for  one  thing  you 
will  not  have  to 
build  an  upper  plat- 

Fig.  105.  —  Supports  for  Elevator  Guides  and  Cables. 

form  to  stand  upon 

to  reach  the  elevator  car  when  it  runs  to  the  top,  and  for 
another  thing  the  supports  for  the  guides  and  cable  can 
be  fastened  directly  to  one  of  the  porch  posts. 
Figure  105  shows  a  large  detail  of 
The  Guide  Supports.     Cross  strips  A,  B,  and  C  should  be 


68  HOME-MADE  TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 

1 8  or  20  inches  long,  about  2  inches  wide,  and  iinch  thick. 
At  a  distance  of  about  1  inch  from  one  end  of  strips  A  and 
B  screw  a  screw-eye  into  one  edge,  and  8  inches  from  those 
eyes  screw  a  second  screw-eye  (D,  Fig.  105).  Screw-eyes 
with  §  inch  eyes  are  large  enough.  A  dozen  will  cost  about 
5  cents  at  the  hardward  store.  The  elevator  guides  are 
fastened  to  these. 

Besides  the  screw-eyes  there  must  be  two  clothes-line 
pulleys  for  the  cable  to  run  over.  These  cost  5  cents 
apiece.  Screw  one  pulley  into  the  edge  of  strip  B,  half- 
way between  the  two  screw-eyes  D  (E,  Fig.  105),  the  other 
into  an  edge  of  strip  C  at  the  same  distance  from  the  end 
that  you  have  placed  the  pulley  in  strip  B  (F,  Fig.  105). 

Nail  strip  A  to  the  porch  post  as  close  to  the  ground  as 
you  can  get  it,  strip  B  to  the  same  face  of  the  same  post, 
about  18  inches  above  the  porch  railing,  and  strip  C  to  the 
opposite  face  of  the  post  at  the  same  height  as  strip  B. 
Nail  these  strips  securely  in  place. 

If  you  cannot  find  a  starch-box  or  other  small  box  out 
of  which  to  make 

The  Car,  go  to  a  grocery  store.  You  will  be  sure  to  find 
just  what  you  want  there.  It  is  not  likely  that  the  grocer 
will  charge  you  anything  for  a  small  box  like  this.  If 
you  have  placed  screw-eyes  D  8  inches  apart,  as  directed, 
the  width  of  the  box  should  be  a  trifle  less  than  this  meas- 
urement, but  if  the  box  you  pick  up  is  wider  the  screw- 
eyes  can  be  spaced  as  much  farther  apart  as  is  necessary  to 
accommodate  it. 


HOME-MADE   TOY   ELEVATORS 


6q 


i  06.  —  Elevator 
Car. 


Figure  106  shows  how  the  box  is  converted  into  the  car. 
Screw  two  screw-eyes  into  each  side  of  the  box,  one  above 
the  other,  as  shown  at  G,  for  the  elevator  guides  to  run 
through,  screw  another  into  the  exact 
center  of  the  top  (H)  to  tie  the  hoisting 
cable  to,  and  screw  another  into  the  exact 
center  of  the  bottom  to  tie  the  lowering 
cable  to.  Nail  a  narrow  strip  across  the 
open  front  of  the  car,  at  the  bottom,  to 
keep  things  from  falling  out. 

Get  heavy  wrapping-twine  or  stovepipe 
wire  for 

The  Guides.      Attach  these  guides  to 
screw-eyes  D  in  strip  B,  first,  drop  them  through  screw- 
eyes  G  in  the  sides  of  the  car,  and  then  fasten  to  screw- 
eyes  D  in  strip  A . 

The  Counter-balance  is  a  large  can  filled 
with  earth,  sand,  or  small  stones.  Its 
weight  must  be  equal  to  about  three  times 
that  of  the  empty  car.  Fasten  the  lifting 
cable  through  holes  punched  in  opposite 
sides  of  the  can  (Fig.  107). 

Use  a  strong  wrapping- twine  for 
The  Lifting  Cable.  After  tying  this  to 
the  counter-balance,  run  it  over  pulley  F, 
then  over  pulley  E,  and  tie  to  screw-eye  77  in  the  top  of 
the  car.  The  cable  must  be  of  the  right  length  so  when 
the  counter-balance  has  dropped  to  the  ground  the  car 


P'ig.  107.  —  Counter- 
balance. 


70  HOME-MADE  TOYS  FOR  GIRLS  AND   BOYS 

will  come  just  above  the  porch  railing,  as  shown  in 
Fig.  104.     Tie 

The  Lowering  Cable  to  the  screw-eye  screwed  into  the 
under  side  of  the  car. 

As  long  as  the  weight  of  the  car  and  its  load  remains 
less  than  half  of  that  of  the  counter-balance,  the  counter- 
balance will  drop  and  by  so  doing  lift  the  car.  The  cable 
attached  to  the  bottom  must  be  pulled  to  lower  the  car. 

Those  of  you  boys  who  own  a  tree-hut,  or  intend  to  build 
one,1  should  erect  an  elevator  similar  to  the  one  just  de- 
scribed, for  hoisting  supplies  to  the  hut. 

1  Plans  for  building  Tree-Huts,  and  a  Dumb-Waiter  for  supplies,  are 
given  in  Chapter  XXV  of  "  The  Handy  Boy." 


CHAPTER  VIII 
HOME-MADE   MECHANICAL  TOYS 

Those  of  you  boys  who  have  examined  the  little  mechan- 
ical toys  sold  upon  the  street  corners  just  before  Christmas 
probably  have  been  surprised  to  find  how  simply  they  are 
made,  and  perhaps  it  has  never  occurred  to  you  that  you 
might  make  toys  equally  as  good  for  presents  for  your 
younger  brothers,  sisters,  or  cousins.  Most  of  the  smaller 
mechanical  toys  are  not  only  easy  to  make,  but  they  re- 
quire materials  which  cost  little  and  can  usually  be  picked 
up  at  home.  Sometimes  it  takes  considerable  thinking 
and  planning  to  discover  just  the  things  which  can  be 
adapted  to  the  various  parts  of  toys ;  but  that  is  where 
part  of  the  fun  of  toy  making  comes  in. 

A  Buzz-Saw  Whirligig  is  an  interesting  toy  (Fig.  108). 
Lay  out  a  disk  about  5  inches  in  diameter  upon  a  piece  of 
cardboard,  locate  the  position  for  the  spool-end  on  the 
center  of  each  face,  and  make  four  rings  outside  of  this. 
Divide  the  circumference  of  the  disk  into  sixteen  equal 
parts,  and  lay  off  the  teeth  as  shown.  (Fig.  in.)  The 
spool-ends  used  for  centers  should  have  two  holes  drilled 
through  them  for  the  twisting  cord  to  slip  through,  and 
should  be  fastened  to  the  disk  with  glue  or  brads. 

71 


72 


HOME-MADE   TOYS  FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


A  cotton  string  is  best  for 

Operating  the  Whirligig.  After  slipping  it  through  the 
holes  in  the  spool-ends,  tie  the  ends  together.  To  work 
the  toy,  slip  the  first  finger  of  each  hand  through  the  loop 

of  each  end,  and  whirl  the 
disk  in  one  direction  until  the 
string  is  twisted  from  both 
ends  as  far  as  the  center. 
Then  pull  firmly  on  the  ends 
of  the  string,  and  the  disk 
will  whirl  in  the  opposite  di- 
rection until  the  string  is  un- 
twisted and  twisted  up  again 
in  the  opposite  direction.  As 
the  strings  twist,  slacken  your 
hold  upon  the  ends,  and  when 
it  has  wound  up  tight  pull 
again  to  make  it  whirl  in  the 
opposite  direction.  The  disk 
should  whirl  very  steadily 
when  working  right,  and  the 
knack  of  making  the  string 
twist  so  the  disk  will  do  so  is  attained  with  a  little 
practice. 

The  Clog-Dancer  (Fig.  109)  is  an  easily  made  loose- 
jointed  doll.  His  dancing-stage  is  a  shingle  or  piece  of 
stiff  cardboard  held  on  the  edge  of  a  chair  beneath  your 
knee.     He  is  held  by  means  of  the  string  attached  to  his 


Fig.  hi. — Detail  of  Buzz-Saw  Whirli- 
gig shown  in  Fig.  108. 


Fig.  109.— The  Eccentric  Clog- 
dancer  is  A  Circus  in  himself. 


Fig.  110.— Pull  the  string  and 
Jack  jumps  comically. 


HOME-MADE   MECHANICAL  TOYS 


73 


head,  so  that  his  feet  rest 
lightly  upon  the  stage,  and 
he  is  made  to  jig  by  tap- 
ping the  outer  end  of  the 
stage  with  the  free  hand. 
With  a  little  practice  the 
figure  can  be  made  to  go 
through  the  steps  of  the 
most  eccentric  clog- 
dancer. 

The  more  grotesque  the 
dancer's  appearance  is,  the 
more  amusing  his  dancing 
will  be,  so  the  cruder  you 
make  him  the  better. 
Figure  112  shows  the 
working  details  for  his 
construction.  The  center 
part  of  a  thread-spool 
forms  the  head,  and  a 
spool-end  and  the  rounded 
end  of  a  broom-handle 
form  the  hat.  These  three 
pieces  are  nailed  together. 
The  body  is  a  piece  of  a 
broom-handle,  and  a 
spool-end  nailed  to  it 
forms  the  shoulders.    Drive 


•RING 

l-BROOM-HANDLE  END 
-SPOOL- END 

■SPOOL 


SPOOL- END 

NAIL 

rBROOM-HANDLE 
(6-1  N.LONG) 


2-1  N.LONG 


If -I  N.LONG 


*— — 2i-IN.L0NG 


2-1 N.  LONG 


Fig.  112. — Details  of  Body  of  the  Clog- 
Dancer  shown  in  Fig.  109. 


74 


HOME-MADE  TOYS  FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


a  nail  into  the  end  of  the  body,  tie  a  string  to  this,  and 
run  the  string  up  through  the  hole  in  the  head,  and  out 

x  through   a   hole  in  the 

hat ;   tie  the  string  to  a 
fancy-work  ring. 

The  arms  and  legs  are 
made  of  sticks  whittled 
to  the  lengths  marked 
in  Fig.  112,  and  about 
|  inch  in  diameter,  and 
are  jointed  by  driving 
tacks  into  their  ends 
and  connecting  these 
with  heavy  linen  thread. 
Figure  112  shows  how 
the  feet  and  hands  are 
cut,  and  how  tacks  are 
driven  into  them  for  the 
thread  connections. 
Paint  the  clog-dancer's 
body,  arms,  and  legs 
2-1 N. WIDE  white,  his  head,  hands, 

Fig.  113.— Details  of  Body  of  the  Jumping-  an<i    feet    black,     and 
Tack  shown  in  Fig.  no.  ,      ,   . 

mark  his  eyes,  nose, 
and  mouth  upon  his  face  in  white. 

A  Toy  Jumping- Jack  is  always  amusing,  and  Fig.  no 
shows  a  simply  constructed  home-made  model.  You  will 
see  by  Fig.  113  how  the  figure  is  made.    The  peaked  hat 


HOME-MADE  MECHANICAL  TOYS  75 

is  half  a  spool  tapered  down  from  the  end  to  the  center; 
and  the  head  is  the  center  from  a  darning-cotton  spool, 
shaped  down  at  one  end  for  a  neck,  and  with  eyes,  nose,  and 
mouth  cut  in  on  one  side.  Figure  113  shows  the  diagrams 
for  the  front  and  back  of  the  body,  the  arms,  and  the  legs. 
These  are  cut  out  of  cigar-box  wood.  Cut  the  neck  stick 
A  long  enough  to  run  through  the  head  and  hat,  with  a 
square  block  on  the  end  to  fit  between  the  body  pieces. 
The  blocks  B  should  be  of  the  same  thickness  as  block  A. 
Bore  the  pivotal  holes  through  the  arms  and  legs  in  the 
positions  shown,  using  a  small  gimlet  or  red-hot  nail  with 
which  to  do  the  boring,  and  tie  a  piece  of  heavy  linen  thread 
through  each  as  shown.  The  arms  and  legs  are  pivoted  on 
brads  driven  through  the  front  of  the  body  into  the  back. 

When  the  body  has  been  fastened  together,  bring  the 
ends  of  the  threads  together,  and  tie  to  a  small  ring ;  also 
knot  the  threads  close  to  the  body  to  keep  them  together. 
In  painting  Jack,  you  might  provide  him  with  a  red  coat, 
blue  trousers  and  a  blue  hat,  white  stockings,  and  black 
shoes. 

A  Cricket-Rattle  is  about  the  liveliest  form  of  rattle 
ever  devised  (Fig.  114).  After  constructing  one  for  your 
sister  or  brother,  you  probably  will  decide  to  make  one  for 
yourself.  For  this  rattle,  first  prepare  a  notched  spool  {A, 
Fig.  116).  The  notches  in  this  need  not  be  cut  as  perfectly 
as  shown,  but  the  notches  in  one  end  of  the  spool  must  be 
exactly  opposite  those  in  the  other  end.  Whittle  the  handle 
B  to  the  shape  and  size  shown,  cut  the  strips  C  out  of  cigar- 


76 


HOME-MADE  TOYS  FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


box  wood,  and  prepare  the  block  D  as  shown.  The  groove 
in  the  edge  of  D  is  cut  of  just  the  right  width  to  receive  the 
end  of  the  wooden  strip  E.  The  length  of  E  is  best  deter- 
mined after  nailing  the  ends  of  strips  C  to  D,  and  slipping 


Z^J 


GROOVEijr^ 


F->  PIECE -OF-SHINGLE" 
OR -OTHER THIN  WOOD 


^y "CI I  GAR-BOX  WOOD  •  6-1 N.  LONG  1    *    1 


Fig.  ii6.  —  Details  of  the  Noisy  Cricket-Rattle  shown  Fig.  114. 

the  handle  through  the  holes  in  strips  C  and  spool  A.  It 
should  extend  from  the  groove  in  D  into  the  notches  in  A. 
Make  it  as  wide  as  the  spool  is  high.  Paint  the  rattle  red 
or  blue. 

The  Turtle  Toy  which  crawls  along  the  floor  when  you 
alternately  pull  and  slacken  a  thread  that  runs  through 
its  shell,  has  always  been  one  of  the  most  popular  of  mechan- 
ical toys,  and  you  will  be  surprised  to  find  how  easily  our 
home-made  model  shown  in  Fig.  1 1 5  is  put  together.  The 
shell  is  a  small  tin  mold  such  as  is  used  for  molding  jellies. 
One  about  4  inches  long  costs  10  cents.     A  mold  having  the 


Fig.  114.— Whirling  the  Cricket-rattle  makes  it  chirp. 


Fig.  115.— The  Crawling  Turtle's  shell  is  a  Jelly  Mould. 


HOME-MADE   MECHANICAL   TOYS 


77 


form  of  a  bunch  of  grapes  is  a  pretty  good  form  for  the 
turtle  shell,  as  you  will  see  by  the  illustrations. 

The  head,  the  tail,  and  the  four  feet  are  cut  out  of  tin  from 
a  can,  and  bent  into  the  forms  shown  in  Fig.  117.  Then 
slits  are  cut  through  the  narrow  rim  of  the  mold  by  piercing 
the  tin  with  the  point  of  a  nail  at  the  proper  places  for 
attaching  them,  as  shown  in  the  small  detail  drawing,  and 

TAIL      STRING 

\  RUBBER- 
s*\  BANDS- 


STRING 

Fig.  117  Fig.  118 

Fig.  117.  —  How  Head,  Feet,  and  Tail  are  Attached  to  a  Jelly  Mold  to  Make 
the  Turtle  shown  in  Fig.  115. 

Fig.  118.  — The  Spool  Wheels  and  the  Rubber-Bands  which  Propel  them. 

the  tab  ends  are  pushed  through  the  slits,  bent  over,  and 
clinched  with  a  pair  of  pincers. 

A  thread  spool  i\  inches  long  forms  the  wheels  on  which 
the  turtle  runs,  and  two  rubber-bands  ij  inches  long 
propel  it.  Cut  a  piece  of  a  lead  pencil  a  trifle  longer  then 
the  spool,  split  it  into  halves,  remove  the  lead,  and  insert 
the  rubber  bands  in  the  groove  ;  then  slip  the  piece  of  pencil 


78  HOME-MADE  TOYS  FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 

into  the  hole  in  the  spool  (Fig.  118).  The  rubber-band 
ends  must  project  an  equal  distance  beyond  the  spool-ends. 
Before  fastening  the  spool  to  the  tin  mold  shell,  tie  the  end 
of  a  piece  of  heavy  linen  thread  to  its  center,  and  then 
wind  about  twenty  turns  about  it.  Pierce  a  hole  through 
each  side  of  the  mold  a  trifle  in  front  of  the  center,  and 
after  slipping  pieces  of  string  through  the  ends  of  the  rubber- 
bands  (Fig.  1 1 8),  tie  them  through  the  holes  pierced  through 
the  sides  of  the  mold.  Pierce  a  hole  through  the  shell, 
directly  over  the  center  of  the  spool,  slip  the  free  end  of 
the  thread  wound  on  the  spool  through  this  hole,  and 
tie  it  to  a  fancy-work  ring  (Fig.  117). 

To  Make  the  Turtle  Crawl,  place  it  upon  the  floor,  pull 
on  the  ring,  and  as  the  thread  unwinds  from  the  spool  the 
rubber-bands  will  twist ;  then  slacken  the  thread,  and  the 
turtle  will  crawl  along  the  floor.  As  the  rubber-bands 
untwist,  the  thread  will  wind  up  on  the  spool  again.  Con- 
tinue pulling  and  slackening  the  thread  alternately,  and  the 
turtle  will  continue  to  crawl. 


CHAPTER  IX 
HOME-MADE   TOPS 

There  are  many  styles  of  tops,  probably  more  than  you 
ever  dreamed  of,  and  it  will  surprise  you  to  hear  that  the 
owners  of  some  of  the  most  curious  forms  are  bearded  men 
who  take  as  much  delight  as  any  girl  or  boy  in  spinning 
them.  A  few  years  ago  on  Murray  Island,  which  is  way 
down  among  the  South  Sea  Islands,  top  spinning  took 
such  a  strong  hold  upon  the  attention  of  the  natives  that 
they  neglected  their  work,  and  families  often  were  without 
food,  boys  and  girls  having  to  go  to  school  hungry. 
Matters  became  so  serious,  in  fact,  as  a  result  of  this  fad 
for  top  spinning,  that,  finally,  the  head  chieftain  was  com- 
pelled to  restrict  it  to  certain  days.  There  are  many  ex- 
perts among  these  South  Sea  Islanders.  The  men  sing  songs 
while  their  tops  spin,  cheer  them  on,  and  take  the  greatest 
precautions  to  shelter  them  from  wind.  An  eye  witness 
of  a  contest  reported  that  the  winning  top  spun  27  min- 
utes, which  you  must  admit  is  a  pretty  long  time. 

Whip-tops  and  peg-tops  of  several  varieties  can  be  pur- 
chased at  the  corner  candy  store,  but  the  kinds  I  am 
going  to  show  you  how  to  make  cannot  be  bought  any- 
where. 

79 


8o 


HOME-MADE  TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


Clock  Wheel  Tops.  A  splendid  spinner  can  be  made  of 
the  little  balance-wheel  of  a  broken  clock  (Fig.  119). 
This  little  wheel  is  so  accurately  made  that  it  will  spin 
very  steadily  from  a  minute  and  one-half  to  two  minutes. 


Fig.  119 


Fig.  120 


Fig.  121 


? 


Fig.  123 

Fig.  124 

Figs.  119  and  120.  —  Clock  Wheel  Tops. 

Fig.  121.  — Upholstering  Tack  Top. 

Fig.  122.  —  How  to  Hold  Upholstering  Tack  for  Spinning. 

Figs.  123  and  124.  — Details  of  Spool  Top. 

As  the  ends  of  this  wheel's  axle  are  pointed,  the  top  will 
stand  in  one  spot  as  long  as  it  spins. 

The  toothed  wheel  shown  in  Fig.  120,  or  any  of  the  other 
forms  of  wheels  from  a  clockwork  will  make  good  spinners, 
yet,  unless  you  file  their  pivot  ends  to  points,  they  will  not 
spin  in  one  spot  but  will  glide  and  hop  over  the  table  in 
spirals.  The  friction  thus  produced  decreases  the  length 
of  time  that  they  will  spin,  but  makes  them  none  the  less 


HOME-MADE  TOPS  81 

interesting  as  tops.  Great  fun  may  be  had  spinning  these 
wheel  tops  around  the  balance-wheel  top,  while  the  latter 
is  spinning.  Figure  129  shows  how  to  hold  a  clock  wheel 
between  the  thumb  and  first  finger,  for  spinning.  Start  it 
with  a  snapping  movement  of  the  fingers. 

A  Rug-Tack  Top.  A  rug  tack  or  large  upholstering  tack 
is  another  good  spinner.  While  the  clockwork  wheels  are 
spun  by  twirling  them  by  means  of  the  upper  end  of  the 
pivots,  the  tack  top  is  spun  by  holding  the  spinning  point 
between  the  thumb  and  first 
finger,  as  shown  in  Fig.  122, 
then  giving  it  a  quick  twirl 
and  dropping  it  upon  a  table. 
The  tack  top  is  an  eccentric 
spinner.  First  it  hops  about 
in  a  very  lively  fashion  ;  then, 
when  you  think  it  is  about  ~W" 
ready  to  topple  over,  it  re-  FlG  i25  _A  shoe.Polish  Can  Top. 
gains  its  balance  and  for  some 

seconds  spins  quite  as  steadily  as  the  clockwork  balance- 
wheel  top.  The  tack  top  can  be  spun  upon  its  head  as 
well  as  upon  its  point. 

A  Spool  Top.  The  top  in  Fig.  123  is  made  from  a  half  of 
a  spool  and  a  short  piece  of  lead-pencil.  Saw  a  spool  into 
halves,  and  then  taper  one  half  from  its  beveled  end  to  the 
center.  Sharpen  the  piece  of  pencil  to  a  point,  and  push  it 
through  the  spool  until  its  point  projects  just  a  trifle. 
Spin  the  spool  top  in  the  same  way  as  the  clock  wheel  tops. 


82 


HOME-MADE  TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


A  Spinning  Top  Race-Track.  By  drawing  a  track  upon 
a  piece  of  cardboard,  as  shown  in  Fig.  129,  with  an  opening 
on  the  inside,  great  fun  may  be  had  by  starting  any  one 
of  the  small  tops  just  described,  with  the  exception  of  the 

balance-wheel  top,  in 
the  center  of  the 
space  inside  of  the 
track,  and  tilting 
the  cardboard  so  as 
to  cause  the  top  to 
spin  through  the 
opening  on  to  the 
track,  and  around 
the  track.  There  is 
a  trick  in  keeping 
the  top  from  run- 
ning off  the  track 
that  can  be  acquired 
only  with  practice. 

A  Shoe-Polish  Can 
Top  (Fig.  125).  This 
is  a  sure-enough  good 
looking  top,  and  it 
spins  as  well  as  it  looks.  It  is  made  of  a  pencil,  a  cone- 
shaped  piece  cut  from  a  spool,  similar  to  the  top  shown 
in  Fig.  123,  and  an  empty  shoe-polish  can. 

The  dotted  line  in  Fig.  126  indicates  how  the  end  of  the 
pencil  sticks  through  a  hole  in  the  shoe-polish  can,  then 


Fig.  128  Fig.  127 

Figs.  126-128. — Details  of  Shoe-Polish  Can  Top 


HOME-MADE  TOPS 


83 


through  the  cone-shaped  piece  of  spool.  The  hole  through 
the  can  must  be  located  in  the  exact  center,  so  the  top 
will  balance  properly.  To  find  the  center,  place  the  box 
bottom  down  upon  a  piece  of  paper,  and  with  a  pencil 
draw  a  line  around  it.  Cut  the  paper  along  the  center,  and 
you  will  have  a  piece  ^_^ 
the  shape  and  size  of  f? 
the  can  bottom. 
Fold  the  piece  in 
half,  then  in  half 
again  the  other  way 
(Fig.  127),  open  it 
up,  and  the  inter- 
section of  the  two 
folds,  indicated  by 
dotted  lines  in  Fig. 
128,  will  be  the  ex- 
act center.  With 
the  center  located, 
place  the  piece  of 
paper  first  upon  the 
bottom,  then  upon 
the  top  of  the  can,  and  punch  a  hole  through  the  center 
of  it  and  the  can,  with  the  point  of  a  large  nail.  Increase 
the  size  of  the  hole  enough  to  admit  the  pencil. 

Spin  this  top  in  the  manner  shown  in  Fig.  125.  Hold 
the  upper  part  of  the  pencil  between  your  hands,  with  the 
palms  together,  and  slide  your  hands  back  and  forth,  first 


Fig.    129. — A   Spinning  Top 
Race-Track. 


84 


HOME-MADE  TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


Fig.  130. — A  Spiral  Top. 


slowly,  then  rapidly.  Release  it  so  as  to  cause  it  to  drop 
squarely  upon  its  point  upon  a  level  wooden  surface. 
The  steadiness  of  this  top's  spinning 
will  depend  entirely  upon  the  ac- 
curacy with  which  you  cut  the  center 
hole  for  the  pencil. 

A    Spiral    Top.     The    top   in    Fig. 
130   presents   a    curious   appearance 
while    spinning,    the    spiral    design 
upon     it     seeming     to     change     its 
form    as    the    top    revolves. 

The  only  difference  between  the  construction  of  this 
top  and  the  shoe- 
polish  can  top  is  in 
the  substitution  of 
the  spiral  disk  for 
the  polish  can.  A 
pencil  and  cone- 
shaped  piece  of 
spool  are  required 
as  in  the  case  of  the 
other  top. 

The  spiral  design 
for  the  disk,  shown 
in  Fig.  131,  is  large 
enough  so  you  can 
make  a  tracing  of  it  on  a  piece  of  transparent  paper, 
and  then  trace  it  off   upon  a  piece  of  cardboard.      Fill 


Fig.  131.  —  Diagram  of  Spiral  for  Spiral  Top. 


HOME-MADE    TOPS 


85 


in  alternate  rings  with  black  ink  or  water-color,  in  the 
way  shown,  then  cut  out  the  disk,  pierce  a  hole  through 
its  exact  center  to  fit  over  the  pencil  end,  and  glue  the 
under  side  to  the  top  of  the  cone-shaped  piece  of  spool. 
Spin  this  top  in  the  same  way  as  the  shoe-polish  can  top  is 
spun  (Fig.  125). 

A  Merry-go-round  Top  (Fig.  132)  is  a   new  idea  easily 
carried  out.     You  will  require  a  cardboard  disk  12  inches 


Fig.  132. — A  Merry-go-round  Top. 


in  diameter,  three  spools,  a  pencil,  and  some  light-weight 
cardboard. 

Figure  133  shows  the  details  for  this  top.  If  you  haven't 
a  compass,  use  a  large-sized  dinner  plate  with  which  to 
draw  the  circumference  of  the  disk  (A).  Then  cut  a 
conical-shaped  piece  of  spool  (B),  stick  the  lead-pencil 
through  it  for  a  spinning  point  (C),  punch  a  hole  through  the 
disk  to  fit  over  the  pencil,  and  tack  the  disk  to  B.     Cut 


86 


HOME-MADE  TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND    BOYS 


off  a  third  of  the  length  of  a 
ribbon  spool  for  E,  and 
fasten  another  spool  (D)  to 
the  top  of  the  pencil.  Spool 
D  should  be  glued  fast  to 
the  pencil,  and  the  spool- 
end  E  should  turn  loosely 
upon  it.  Coat  the  lower  part 
of  the  pencil  with  glue  so  it 
will  stick  fast  in  B. 

How  the  Top  Spins. 
When  you  have  made  this 
much  of  the  top,  spin  it 
to  see  how  it  works.  Wrap 
the  spinning  cord  —  a  strong 
lightweight  wrapping-twine 
— about  spool  D,  in  the  same 
manner  that  you  wind  the  cord  on  any  top  ;  then,  holding 
spool  end  E  with  the  left  hand  (Fig.  132),  pull  steadily 
upon  the  cord  with  the  right  hand 
until  all   is   unwound,   and   gently  ) 

drop    the    top    upon    its    spinning 
point.     To  get  the  best  results,  the         f — 
cardboard   used  for  the  disk  plat-       A 

under  a  pile  of  books.  „         "     TT      TT       " 

r  ig.    1 34.  —  How   Horses   are 

Horses  and  Riders  for  the  merry-  Mounted  upon  Top  platform. 


Fig. 


133- 


Detail   of   Merry-go-round 
Top. 


form  must  be  very  straight 
warps,    flatten    it    by    pressing 


HOME-MADE  TOPS  87 

go-round  may  be  prepared  like  those  of  the  clockwork 
merry-go-round  in  Chapter  X  (Figs.  143,  146,  and  147). 
Figure  134  shows  how  two  burnt  matches  or  toothpicks 
are  lashed  to  the  legs  of  the  horses  for  supports,  and 
Fig.  133  shows  how  holes  are  pierced  through  the  disk 
platform  to  stick  them  in. 

A  Flag  mounted  upon  spool  D  will  make  the  merry-go- 
round  top  complete. 


CHAPTER  X 
HOME-MADE  CLOCKWORK  TOYS 

The  toys  shown  opposite  page  90  are  a  few  of  the  many 
mechanical  toys  which  can  be  operated  by  clockwork, 
and  they  are  easy  to  make,  too,  requiring  no  more  mechan- 
ical ability  than  is  possessed  by  the  average  boy  old  enough 
to  handle  the  simplest  of  tools. 

Generally  it  is  easy  to  find  an  old  clock  somewhere 
about  the  house,  and  a  clock  which  has  been  discarded 
simply  because  it  has  become  worthless  as  a  timekeeper 
is  perfectly  good  for  operating  these  toys,  provided  the 
mainspring  is  in  working  order.  It  is  not  necessary  to 
have  a  set  of  works  for  each  toy,  for  they  are  so  quickly 
fastened  in  place  that  but  a  minute  is  required  to  transfer 
the  works  from  one  toy  to  another. 

Before  commencing  work  upon  the  toys,  get  together 

The  Other  Necessary  Materials.  These  will  consist  of 
cigar  boxes,  cardboard,  cotton  or  silk  spools,  glue,  brads, 
and  a  few  pieces  from  the  woodpile,  with  one  or  two  ad- 
ditional articles  which  are  mentioned  later  on.  Brads 
I  inch  and  1  inch  in  length  should  be  purchased  for  fas- 
tening the  framework  of  the  toys  together,  and  the  cigar 
boxes  should  be  about  8  inches  by  4  inches  by  2   inches 


HOME-MADE   CLOCKWORK  TOYS 


89 


in  size.     Remove  the  paper  from  the  boxes  as  described  on 
page  175. 

To  Prepare  the  Clockwork  for  use,  remove  it  from  its 
case,  detach  the  hands  and  face,  and  pry  off  the  small 
wheel  pivoted  directly  under  the  hands ;  this  wheel  is 
shown  at  A  in  Fig.  139.     Remove  also  the  balance-wheel 


Fig.  139.  —  How  the  Clockwork  Motor  is  Fastened  to  the  Cigar-Box  Cover. 

(This  Box  has  been  cut  down  to  the  Proper  Length  for  the  Ferris  Wheel.) 

B  (Fig.  139)  and  the  lever  C  pivoted  next  to  it,  to  increase 
the  speed  of  the  remaining  wheels. 

Fasten  the  clockwork  motor  for 

The  Merry-go-round  shown  in  Fig.  135  to  the  cover  of 
a  cigar  box,  as  illustrated  in  Figs.   136  and  139,  boring 


90  HOME-MADE  TOYS  FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 

holes  through  the  cover  with  a  gimlet  for  the  pivot  ends 
on  the  back  of  the  works  to  set  into.  Remove  the  lower 
flange  from  a  spool  (D,  Fig.  139)  and  fasten  the  spool 
on  to  the  central  pivot  of  the  clockwork  in  the  position 
formerly  occupied  by  wheel  A.  The  hole  in  the  spool 
will  be  too  large  for  the  pivot  and  must  be  rilled  up  with 
sealing-wax.  To  do  this,  hold  a  piece  of  sealing-wax 
above  the  spool  and  melt  it  with  a  lighted  match,  allow- 
ing it  to  drip  into  the  hole  until  the  latter  is  about  half 
full,  then  press  the  wax  down  with  the  end  of  a  match 
until  it  is  compact,  smooth  it  off  on  the  bottom  of  the 
spool,  and  make  a  dent  in  it  with  a  pencil  to  indicate  the 
exact  center  of  the  hole.  Heat  the  end  of  the  pivot  with 
a  lighted  match,  and  press  it  into  the  dent  in  the  wax, 
being  careful  in  doing  so  to  get  the  spool  straight  upon 
the  pivot.  Cut  a  hole  through  the  bottom  of  the  cigar 
box  belonging  to  the  cover  to  which  you  have  attached 
the  works,  for  spool  D  to  project  through  (Fig.  139). 

To  Make  the  Standard  for  the  merry-go-round,  cut  four 
strips  of  wood  8  inches  long,  and  fasten  one  to  each  corner 
of  the  cigar  box,  turning  the  bottom  side  of  the  box  up ; 
then  cut  a  piece  of  J-inch  board  10  inches  square,  locate  its 
center  F  by  drawing  diagonal  lines  from  corner  to  corner 
as  shown  in  Fig.  140,  bore  a  i-inch  hole  through  it  at  this 
point  for  spool  D  (Fig.  136),  and  then  nail  the  box  to  the 
center  of  the  board  as  shown  in  Fig.  140. 

The  Tent  should  be  laid  out  upon  heavy  white  paper 
as  shown  in  Fig.   141.     After  describing  a  circle  with  a 


Fig.  136.     A  Clockwork  Motor. 


Eig.   138.     The    "Flying 
Airships." 


HOME-MADE   CLOCKWORK  TOYS 


9i 


radius  of  9  inches,  describe  another  circle  within  it  with 
a  radius  of  7J  inches,  this  inner  circle  (shown  by  dotted 
lines  in  the  diagram)  being 
drawn  for  a  guide  in  fas- 


FiG.  140.  —  Plan  of  Top  of  Stand- 
ard for  Merry-go-round. 


Fig.  141.  —  Pattern  for  Tent  of  Merry- 
go-round. 


tening  the  tent  upon  its  tent-poles.     Cut  out    the   tent 

along  the  outer  circle,  and  from  it  cut  a  triangular  piece 

about  the  size  of  that  included  between  lines  KL  and  ML 

in    the    diagram.       Cover    the 

under    edge    of    KL    and    the 

upper  edge  of  ML  with  glue,  lap 

KL  over  to  about  NL,  and  rub 

down  the  edges  with  a  cloth  to 

make  as  neat  a  joint  between 

the  pieces  as  possible  (Fig.   142).     Bore  a  hole  through 

each  corner  of  the  standard  top  (G,  H,  I,  and  /,  Fig.  140)? 

then  cut  four  sticks  7  inches  long,  sandpaper  them  until 

smooth,  and  glue  them  into  these  holes  for 


Fig.  142.  — The  Tent  ready  to  be 
Fastened  upon  a  Tent-Pole. 


92  HOME-MADE  TOYS  FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 

The  Tent-Poles.  When  the  tent  has  dried,  tack  it  to 
the  ends  of  the  poles,  being  careful  to  make  it  set  evenly 
upon  them ;  cut  a  scalloped  border  out  of  red  or  blue 
paper  and  paste  it  to  the  edge  all  around  as  shown  in 
Fig.  135,  and  stick  a  small  flag  in  the  peak. 

The  Horses.  A  full-size  pattern  for  these  is  shown  in 
Fig.  143.     Take  a  piece  of  tracing-paper  or  any  thin  trans- 


Fig.  143.  —  Full-size  Pattern  for  the  Horses  of  the  Merry-go-round. 


parent  paper,  and  place  it  over  the  pattern  and  make  an 
exact  copy ;  then  rub  a  soft  lead-pencil  over  the  other  side 
of  the  paper,  turn  the  paper  over  with  the  blackened  side 
down,  and  transfer  the  drawing  six  times  upon  a  piece  of 
lightweight  cardboard.     Paint  the  horses  with  water-col- 


HOME-MADE   CLOCKWORK  TOYS  93 

ors,  using  the  pattern  as  a  guide  for  shading  and  marking 
them,  then  cut  them  out  with  a  sharp  knife  or  a  pair  of 
scissors. 

Figure  144  shows  the  pattern  for 

The  Sleighs.  Draw  this  out  upon  a  piece  of  card- 
board, cut  it  out  and  fold  along  the  dotted  lines,  then  turn 


Fig.  144.  —  Pattern  for  the  Merry-go-round  Sleighs. 

in  the  flaps  and  glue  them  to  the  dashboard  and  to  the 
back.  Cut  two  seats  by  the  pattern  given,  bend  down 
the  flaps  and  glue  them  to  the  sides  of  the  sleigh,  and 
make  the  back  for  the  front  seat  like  that  on  the  back 
seat  (Fig.  145).  Then  make  another  sleigh  similar  to 
the  one  just  completed,  for  two  are  required  for  the  merry- 
go-round.  Paint  the  sleighs  green  or  yellow  with  trim- 
mings of  a  lighter  shade. 

Figure  136  shows 

The  Shafts  upon  which  the  horses  and  sleighs  are 
mounted.     Cut  them  5^  inches  long,  whittle  them  round, 


94  HOME-MADE  TOYS  FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 

and  rub  them  down  with  sandpaper.  The  shafts  are 
fastened  in  a  spool  hub  which  has  five  holes  bored  in  it  (E, 
Fig.   136) ;    bore  the  holes  with  a  gimlet  or  small  drill, 

marking  them  off  first  with  a 
pencil  to  be  sure  of  getting  them 
spaced  at  equal  distances.  Point 
the  ends  of  the  shafts  and  glue 
them  into  the  holes  in  the  hub, 
then  connect  this  spool  to  spool 
Fig.  145 —a  Completed  sleigh    J)  with  a  piece  of  a  lead-pencil 

showing  Attachment  to  Shaft.  .       ,         .  /T-,.  .*. 

2  inches  long  (.big.  136). 

To  fasten  the  horses  to  the  shafts,  punch  a  hole  through 
three  of  them  at  X  (Fig.  143)  and  slip  each  one  over  a 
shaft,  then  tack  the  other  three  horses  to  the  ends  of  these 
shafts  at  the  point  X.  To  fasten  the  sleighs  to  the  re- 
maining shafts,  glue  one  end  of  a  piece  of  paper  to  the 
back  of  the  front  seat  and  the  other  end  around  the  shaft 
(Fig.  145). 

The  Girl  Riders  for  the  sleighs  are  shown  full  size  in 
Fig.  146,  and 

The  Boy  Riders  for  the  horses  are  shown  full  size  in 
Fig.  147.  Make  tracings  from  the  patterns  as  you  made 
that  of  the  horse  and  prepare  four  girls  and  six  boys. 
Paint  their  clothes  in  bright  colors.  Cut  a  second  leg 
for  each  boy  rider,  so  he  can  be  made  to  sit  astride  of  his 
horse,  and  glue  the  leg  to  his  hip  as  shown  in  Fig.  148. 
Cut  a  slit  in  each  seat  of  the  sleigh  and  stick  the  flaps  on 
the  girl  riders  in  them. 


HOME-MADE   CLOCKWORK  TOYS 


95 


For  the  Platform  shown  directly  under  the  horses  and 
sleighs  in  Fig.  135,  cut  a  piece  of  cardboard  11  inches  in 
diameter ;  if  you  choose  to  make  the  Ferris  wheel  before 
the  merry-go-round,  you  may  use  the  center  pieces  re- 
moved in  cutting  out  the  rims,  as  noted  in  Fig.  153.     Punch 


Fig.   146 


Fig.  146.  —  Full-size  Pattern  for 
the  Girl  Riders. 


Fig. 


Fig.  148.  —  How  the 
Second  Leg  of  the 
Boy  is  Attached. 


Fig.  147.  — Full-size  Pattern  for  the  Boy  Riders. 

a  hole  through  the  center  of  this  disk  large  enough  for  the 
peg  connecting  spools  D  and  E  to  slip  through.  This 
platform  rests  upon  the  top  of  spool  D  and  revolves  with  it. 
To  Operate  the  Merry-go-round.  The  key  by  which 
the  mainspring  is  wound  up  is  shown  screwed  in  place  on 
the  under  side  of  the  cigar-box  cover  in  Fig.  139.  While 
winding  the  mainspring,  it  will  be  necessary  to  have  some 


96  HOME-MADE  TOYS  FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 

means  of  checking  it  so  it  will  not  unwind  at  the  same 
time,  and  the  best  scheme  for  a  check  is  to  bore  a  small 
gimlet  hole  through  the  cover  of  the  cigar  box  and  stick 
a  match  through  this  and  run  it  between  the  spokes  of  one 
of  the  clock  wheels  so  as  to  prevent  it  from  turning.  Then 
when  you  have  wound  up  the  spring  and  are  ready  to  start 
the  merry-go-round,  all  you  have  to  do  is  to  pull  out  the 
match. 

The  model  of  this  toy  which  the  author  has  before  him 
runs  for  five  minutes  with  one  winding,  and  any  boy  can 
make  one  which  will  run  as  well  if  he  follows  the  directions 
given  and  uses  a  reasonable  amount  of  carefulness  in  the 
work. 

Other  Animals  than  horses  may  be  used  if  you  wish  to 
follow  the  arrangement  of  some  of  the  latest  merry-go- 
rounds,  and  pictures  of  these  may  be  found  among  the 
colored  cut-outs  sold  in  the  stationery  stores,  or  if  you 
can  draw  well,  you  may  copy  them  from  books  and  maga- 
zines. Great  fun  may  be  had  by  changing  the  positions 
of  the  boy  riders,  making  them  ride  backward  part  of  the 
time  and  sometimes  two  and  three  boys  on  a  horse. 

Doubtless  you  have  heard  of  the  famous  Ferris  wheel, 
and  a  good  many  of  you  have  ridden  in  the  smaller  wheels 
patterned  after  it,  at  the  amusement  parks,  so  you  will  be 
interested  in  making 

A  Miniature  Ferris  Wheel  like  the  one  shown  in  Fig. 

137. 
The    Standard    for    supporting    the    wheel    (Fig.    149) 


HOME-MADE   CLOCKWORK   TOYS 


97 


consists  of  two  triangular  supports,  one  with  a  spool  hub 
fastened  to  its  top  for  the  axle  of  the  wheel  to  run  through 
and  the  other  with  the  cigar  box  inclosing  the  clockwork 
fastened  to  it.  Figures  150,  151,  and  152  show  the  con- 
struction of  these  supports.  Cut  strips  P  and  Q  12  inches 
long  and  R  10  inches  long,  and  trim  off  the  upper  ends  of 
P  and  Q  so  when  they  are  nailed  together  the  lower  ends 
will  be  8  inches  apart ;  nail 
strip  R  to  the  lower  ends  of 
P  and  Q  (Fig.  150).  To 
fasten  the  spool  hub  to  its 
support,  smear  one  side  of 
a  piece  of  tape  with  glue 
and  wind  it  several  times 
around  the  spool  (Fig.  151), 
then  set  the  spool  on  top 
of  the  support  and  press  the 
ends  of  the  tape  against  the 
sides  of  strips  P  and  Q  (Fig. 

152). 
The  Clockwork  Motor  for  the  Ferris  wheel  is  fastened 

to  the  cover  of  a  cigar  box  just  as  that  for  the  merry- 
go-round  was  fastened  (Fig.  139),  but  the  length  of  the 
box  is  cut  down  as  much  as  the  clockwork  will  allow  to 
make  the  box  as  square  and  compact  as  possible. 

It  is  very  necessary  to  have  the  axle  bearings  exactly 
on  a  line  in  order  to  have  the  wheel  run  smoothly,  so,  in 
fastening  the  cigar  box  to  its  support,  be  sure  that  the  cen- 


Fig.  149.  —  Standard  for  the  Ferris 
Wheel. 


98 


HOME-MADE  TOYS  FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


ter  of  the  hole  in  spool  D  (Fig.  139)  is  on  a  level  with  the 
spool  hub  on  the  opposite  support.     Nail  the  supports  to  a 
10-inch  by  12-inch  board,  8  inches  apart,  and  fasten  a 
cigar  box  between  them  for 
The  Station  Platform  (Fig.  149). 

To  Make  the  Wheel,  first  lay  out  the  rims  upon  a  piece 
of  heavy  cardboard,  using  the  radii    shown  in  Fig.    153 

for  describing  the  circles, 
then  lay  the  sheet  of  card- 
board upon  a  board  and 

Cut  out  the  Rims  with 
a  sharp  knife,  being  careful 
not  to  run  off  of  the  pencil 
line.     The 

Hubs  of  the  wheel  are 
spools  with  six  holes  bored 
in  them  for  the  spokes  to 
fit  in  (Fig.  156).     Cut  six 

Spokes  5!  inches  long 
by  I  inch  thick  for  each 
hub,  and  cut  a  slot  in  one 
end  of  each  for  the  cardboard  rims  to  fit  in  (Figs.  154 
and  157).  Use  a  saw  rather  than  a  knife  in  making  the 
slots,  for  it  will  make  a  kerf  of  just  the  right  width  to 
receive  the  cardboard  and  will  not  be  so  apt  to  split  the 
ends  of  the  slender  spokes.  Whittle  the  hub  ends  of  the 
spokes  to  fit  the  holes  in  the  spool  hubs  (Figs.  154  and 
157)-     In 


Fig.  150.  —  Make  Two  Supports  like 
this  for  the  Ferris  Wheel  Standard. 

Figs.  151  and  152.  —  How  a  Spool  is 
Fastened  to  the  Top  of  the  Support 
for  a  Hub. 


HOME-MADE  CLOCKWORK  TOYS 


99 


Fig-  153  Fig-  154  Fig.  155 

Fig.  153.  — How  to  Lay  out  the  Cardboard  Rims  of  the  Ferris  Wheel. 

Fig.  154.  —The  Spokes  Fitted  into  the  Spool  Hub. 

Fig.  155.  — The  Rim  Slipped  into  the  End  of  the  Spokes. 

Putting  together  the  Spokes,  Hubs,  and  Rims  of  the 

wheel,  first  stick  three  spokes  in  a  hub  and  slip  a  rim  into 
the  slots  in  their  ends,  then  stick  the  remaining  spokes 
into  the  hub,  one  at  a  time,  and  spread  the  rim  enough  so 
it  can  be  slipped  into  their 
slots  (Fig.  155). 

When  the  hubs,  rims, 
and  spokes  have  been  as- 
sembled, lay  them  aside 
and  get  some  heavy  wrap- 
ping-paper or  thin  card- 
board out  of  which 

To  Make  the  Cars.  The  pattern  for  the  cars  is  shown 
in  Fig.  158,  and  on  it  you  will  find  all  the  dimensions 
necessary  for  laying  it  out  to  the  proper  size.  It  will  be 
understood  that  the   unfigured  portions   of   the   drawing 

WW 


Fig.  156.  —  A 
Spool  Hub  for 
the  Wheel. 


Fig.  157. — How  the 
Spokes,  Rims,  and 
Axles  are  Fastened 
Together. 


TOO 


HOME-MADE   TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


are  the  same  as  those  with  dimensions  marked  upon  them. 
The  dotted  lines  at  the  door  and  window  openings  in- 
dicate where  the  cutting  is  to  be  done,  while  all  other 


;    T]  f      j 

1  i  i 
L__i_!  l : 


Fig.  158.  — Pattern  for  the  Ferris  Wheel  Cars. 


dotted  lines  indicate  where  the  cardboard  is  to  be  scored 
and  folded. 

Use  a  ruler  in  making  the  drawing  of  the  car  to  get  the 
lines  straight,  and  when  you  have  finished  it  go  over  it 
carefully  and  compare  it  with  the  illustration  to  be  sure 


HOME-MADE   CLOCKWORK  TOYS 


IOI 


it  is  correct,  after  which  make  a  careful  tracing  of  it,  turn 
it  over  and  transfer  the  drawing  five  times  upon  cardboard. 
These  and  your  original  drawing  will  give  you  the  required 
number  of  cars.  Cut  out  the  openings  with  a  sharp  knife 
and  then  do  the  rest  of  the  cutting  with  a  pair  of  scissors ; 
punch  a  f-inch  hole  in  each  end  of  each  car  with  a  lead- 
pencil  (Fig.  158),  being  careful  to  get  the  holes  exactly 
opposite.  In  folding  and  gluing  the  cars,  slip  the  flaps 
inside  and  bend  the      ^ — 


roofs  so  they  will 
follow  the  curve  of 
the  ends  (Fig.  159.) 
When  the  cars 
have  been  com- 
pleted, cut  six  sticks 


A  Completed  Car  for  the  Ferris  Wheel. 


5  inches  long,  whittle  them  down  until  they  are  about  yq 
inch  in  diameter,  and  sandpaper  them  until  they  are  per- 
fectly round  and  smooth.  These  sticks  connect  the  rims 
of  the  wheel  and  form 

The  Axles  from  which  the  cars  are  hung  (Fig.  159). 
Great  care  must  be  used  in  fastening  them  between  the 
rims,  for  they  are  easily  split,  and  the  best  way  to  do  is 
to  start  a  hole  first  in  the  ends  of  each  axle  with  an  awl 
or  by  driving  a  brad  part  way  in  and  then  withdrawing 
it ;  then  drive  a  brad  through  each  spoke  of  one  rim  into 
an  axle  (Fig.  157) ;  slip  the  other  ends  of  the  axles  through 
the  holes  in  the  ends  of  the  cars  (Fig.  159),  and  nail  the 
spokes  of  the  other  rim  to  them. 


102  HOME-MADE  TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 

To  Mount  the  Wheel  upon  its  standard,  whittle  an  axle 
8J  inches  long  to  fit  the  hubs,  then  hold  the  wheel  between 
the  two  uprights,  with  the  hubs  on  a  line  with  the  spool 
bearings  and  run  the  axle  through  the  holes  (Fig.  137). 

Build  Steps  at  each  end  of  the  platform  out  of  heavy 
writing-paper  or  light  cardboard.  Fold  the  paper  or  card- 
board back  and  forth,  making  pleats  about  J  inch  wide  for 
the  steps,  and  after  gluing  it  in  place  cut  out  the  balus- 
trades and  glue  them  to  the  edges  of  the  steps.  Make  the 
top  step  low  enough  so  there  will  be  about  J-inch  clearance 
between  it  and  the  bottom  of  the  cars  (Fig.  137). 

After  you  have  made  a  final  inspection  to  see  that 
everything  has  been  put  together  properly,  your  toy  will 
be  ready  for  operation,  and  I  am  sure  that  when  you  set 
the  clockwork  machinery  in  motion,  and  the  little  wheel 
begins  to  revolve  slowly  with  each  little  car  balancing 
upon  its  axle,  you  will  agree  that  you  have  constructed 
a  very  interesting  toy. 

The  "  Flying  Airships  "  is  a  riding  device  consisting  of 
a  number  of  cars  suspended  by  steel  cables  from  large 
arms  pivoted  to  the  top  of  a  tower.  When  the  machin- 
ery is  started,  the  arms  begin  to  revolve  slowly,  and  the 
motion  produced  causes  the  cars  to  swing  out  away  from 
the  center.  As  the  speed  of  the  arms  increases,  the  cars 
swing  out  farther  and  farther,  until  when  the  highest 
speed  has  been  reached  the  cables  by  which  the  cars  are 
suspended  have  taken  an  oblique  position  and  raised  the 
cars  some  distance  above  the  ground ;    then  the  speed  of 


HOME-MADE  CLOCKWORK  TOYS  103 

the  engine  is  gradually  diminished,  and  the  cars  finally 
regain  their  former  position.  This  piece  of  apparatus  is 
also  known  as  an  aerostat. 

You  will  find  the  miniature  flying  airships  (Fig.  138) 
easy  to  construct  after  making  a  merry-go-round  or  Ferris 
wheel,  as  many  of  its  details  are  identical  with  those  of  the 
other  toys. 

The  Standard  for  the  toy  is  made  similar  to  the  one  for 
the  merry-go-round  (Fig.  135),  except  that  the  top  board 
is  omitted  and  a  circular  piece  of  cardboard  of  the  size 
of  the  disks  removed  in  cutting  out  the  rims  of  the  Ferris 
wheel  is  substituted  in  its  place.  Cut  a  hole  through  the 
exact  center  of  the  piece  large  enough  so  it  will  fit  over 
spool  D  (Fig.  136). 

Cut  a  Mast  about  14  inches  long  and  of  the  diameter 
of  the  hole  in  the  spool  and  stick  it  into  spool  D ;  then 
3  inches  below  the  top  of  the  mast  fasten  a  spool  with 
four  horizontal  arms  6  inches  long  glued  into  holes  bored 
in  it.  Fasten  a  cross-piece  4^  inches  long  to  the  end  of 
each  arm  with  brads,  and  from  these  suspend 

Cars  made  similar  to  those  of  the  Ferris  wheel,  with 
cords.  Set  a  small  flag  in  a  hole  bored  in  the  top  of  the 
mast  and  then  run  cords  from  the  top  of  the  mast  out  to 
the  ends  of  the  arm  pieces. 

With  this  toy  the  cars  cannot  be  swung  out  obliquely 
as  on  the  large  flying  airships  except  by 

Increasing  the  Speed  of  the  Clockwork.  This  can  be 
accomplished  by  removing  one  or  two  of  the  wheels  of 


104  HOME-MADE  TOYS  FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 

the  clockwork,  but  it  is  not  advisable  to  take  out  more 
than  one  wheel  in  addition  to  those  removed  for  the  merry- 
go-round  (Fig.  139)  because  the  mainspring  would  require 
rewinding  too  often  to  make  the  toy  enjoyable. 

An  Electric  Motor  can  be  belted  to  these  toys  as  a  sub- 
stitute for  the  clockwork,  if  you  own  one  and  prefer  to  try 
it  out. 

The  clockwork  toys  just  described  were  invented  by  the 
author  for  his  book  "  Handicraft  for  Handy  Boys,"  and 
were  the  first  designs,  he  believes,  devised  for  home-made 
mechanical  toys  of  this  nature.  No  doubt  you  have  noticed 
that  manufacturers  of  the  so-called  "  construction  sets  " 
—  steel  and  wood  strips  supplied  with  bolts  and  screws  for 
assembling  —  have  used  these  very  same  forms  of  models  to 
show  what  can  be  made  with  their  outfits.  But  your 
Ferris  wheel,  merry-go-round,  and  aerostat,  built  as  de- 
scribed in  this  chapter,  with  materials  picked  up  at  home, 
will  be  the  equal  of  any  that  can  be  built,  and  you  will  have 
the  satisfaction  of  knowing  that  you  haven't  required  an 
expensive  "  construction  set  "  for  making  them. 

All  sorts  of  toy  vehicles  can  be  operated  by  clockwork. 
Figure  160  shows 

An  Automobile,  and  Fig.  161  shows  how  the  clockwork 
motor  is  mounted  upon  the  chassis  and  belted  to  the  driving 
wheel.  The  same  scheme  that  was  used  for  the  cars  of 
the  toy  railway  described  in  Chapter  VI  will  be  followed 
in  making 

The  Frame  of  the  automobile,  as  that  is  about  the  sim- 


Fig.  160.     The  Car  Completed. 


Fig  161.     The  Framework. 


HOME-MADE   CLOCKWORK  TOYS 


°5 


plest  way,  and  makes  a  light,  easy-running  vehicle.  The 
bed  will  be  cut  of  a  different  pattern,  however,  as  will  be 
seen  in  Fig.  162.  Lay  out  the  piece  to  the  dimensions 
shown  upon  this  drawing,  and  then  cut  it  out,  making  a 
mortise  in  each  end  for  the  wheels  to  fit  in.  The  spool 
wheels  should  be  mounted  in  the  same  nanner  as  those 
of  the  railway  cars,  for  which  see  Fig.  80,  Chapter  VI,  and 
the  directions  upon  page  51.  One  end  of  spool  A  should 
be  pivoted  with  a  longer  finishing  nail  than  those  used  for 


t=TT=Z 

6* 

-^=3 

t-S-l    1 

1* 

-H  ml* 

1?- 

A 
*** 

1 

V 

\ 

I 

I  =-  1      .. 

\* 

Fig.  162. — Top  View  of  Wooden  Frame. 

the  other  pivots,  so  that  when  driven  in  place  about  half 
an  inch  will  project  beyond  the  frame.  A  small  silk  spool 
should  be  fastened  upon  this  for  a  belt-wheel  (see  B,  Fig. 
162).  The  hole  in  one  of  these  spools  is  about  three- 
sixteenths  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  so,  in  order  to  make  it  lit 
tightly  upon  the  nail,  it  is  necessary  to  fill  in  around  the  nail 
with  sealing-wax.  To  do  this,  turn  the  wooden  frame 
upon  its  edge  and  place  the  spool  over  the  nail,  being 
careful  to  get  the  nail  in  the  exact  center  of  the  hole. 
Then  hold  a  stick  of  sealing-wax  over  the  spool,  and  with 
a  lighted  match  melt  the  end  and  allow  it  to  drip  into  the 


106  HOME-MADE  TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND  BOYS 

hole.  When  the  hole  has  been  partially  rilled,  allow  the 
wax  to  harden  a  little,  and  then  press  it  down  around  the 
nail  with  the  end  of  a  match,  being  careful  not  to  throw 
the  spool  out  of  center  by  doing  so.  The  hole  should  then 
be  filled  to  the  top. 

We  are  now  ready  to  prepare  the  clockwork  for  mount- 
ing upon  the  wooden  frame.  The  works  shown  in  Fig.  161 
are  from  an  alarm  clock,  but  if  you  have  a  striking  clock, 
or  one  with  works  a  little  different  from  those  shown  in  the 
illustration,  it  does  not  make  a  bit  of  difference  in  the 
scheme  for  attaching  the  works.  The  three  parts  shown 
in  the  foreground  of  Fig.  161  must  first  be  removed  from 
the  works.  These  will  be  recognized  readily  in  any  clock, 
as  they  are  pivoted  close  together,  and  regulate  the  speed 
of  the  other  wheels.  When  they  have  been  removed,  the 
mainspring  will  unwind  rapidly.  The  frame  of  the  works 
shown  in  the  illustration  is  held  together  with  nuts,  so 
that  in  removing  the  wheels  it  was  necessary  to  unscrew 
two  of  them,  spring  the  frame  open  enough  to  let  the 
wheels  drop  out,  and  then  replace  the  nuts  again  in  their 
former  positions.  If  the  frame  of  your  clockwork  is 
riveted  together,  the  wheels  will  have  to  be  broken  out. 
A  small  silk  spool,  such  as  B  (Fig.  162),  should  be  fastened 
upon  the  small  pivot  which  originally  operated  the  clock's 
hands,  for  a  belt-wheel.  Lay  the  works  upon  a  table  with 
the  face-side  down,  and,  after  centering  the  hole  of  the  spool 
upon  the  pivot,  fasten  it  in  place  with  sealing-wax  in  the 
same  manner  as  you  attached  spool  B  (Fig.  161). 


HOME-MADE   CLOCKWORK  TOYS  107 

The  works  should  now  be  attached  to  the  wooden 
frame.  Place  them  with  the  striker  uppermost,  near  the 
edge  of  the  frame,  so  that  the  small  belt-wheels  are  in 
line  with  one  another.  Then  bore  a  number  of  gimlet 
holes  in  the  wooden  frame  and  run  copper  wire  through 
them,  passing  it  around  the  posts  of  the  clock-frame  and 
twisting  its  ends  until  the  works  are  firmly  fastened  in 
place. 

A  rubber  band  about  an  eighth  of  an  inch  wide  and  long 
enough  to  reach  from  one  belt-wheel  to  the  other  should 
be  procured  for 

The  Belt.  This  should  stretch  just  enough  to  cling 
upon  the  spools,  as  more  than  that  would  cause  too  much 
friction. 

Before  going  any  further  with  the  construction  of  the 
automobile 

Test  the  Machine,  to  be  sure  that  it  is  in  perfect  running 
order.  Wind  up  the  mainspring,  pressing  a  finger  against 
one  of  the  wheels  to  hold  it  in  check  until  you  are  ready  to 
start  the  machine.  When  properly  made,  the  clockwork 
automobile  should  run  a  distance  of  from  twenty  to  twenty- 
five  feet  upon  a  wooden  floor,  while  about  three-quarters 
of  that  distance  should  be  covered  upon  a  floor  with  a  fairly 
smooth  carpet. 

The  Cardboard  Sides  and  other  details  of  the  auto- 
mobile should  now  be  made.  The  patterns  for  these  have 
been  so  shown  in  Figs  163  to  170  that  they  can  easily  be 
laid  out  to  the  proper  shape  and  size  by  means  of  the  pro- 


io8 


HOME-MADE  CLOCKWORK  TOYS 


109 


cess  of  enlarging  by  squares  described  on  page  175,  Chapter 
XVII.  White  cardboard  should  be  used  upon  which  to 
draw  these  pieces,  and  the  thinner  it  is 
the  easier  you  will  find  it  to  work  with. 
First  prepare  the  two  sides,  cutting 
them  out  by  the  pattern  of  Fig.  163. 
Then  glue  the  bottom  edge  of  each  side 
to  the  edge  of  the  wooden  frame,  cutting 
holes  in  the  left  side  for  the  belt-wheels 
and  projecting  posts  to  run  through  (see 
Fig.  160  and  A,  B,  C,  D,  and  E,  Fig. 
172).  The  top  to  the  front  of  the  car 
should  now  be  cut  as  shown  in  Fig.  173, 
the  distance  between  the  sides  being 
measured  to  get  the  piece  of  proper 
dimensions.  Bend  the  edges  as  in  Fig.  173,  and  glue  them 
to  the  inner  surfaces  of  the  side  pieces  as  shown  by  the 
dotted  lines  in  Fig.  172.  In  the  same  way  cut  and  glue 
a  piece  of  cardboard  between  the  side  pieces  at  G  and  H 


Fig.  171. 


HAMMER 

ON 

Clockworks 


Chauffeur. 


Fig.  172.  —  Cardboard  Side  of  Automobile. 


no 


HOME-MADE   TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


(Fig.  172)  for  the  seat-backs.  The  bent  edges  of  these 
pieces  are  shown  by  dotted  lines  in  the  illustration.  Draw 
four 

Wheels  as  shown  in  Fig.  164,  using  a  compass  with  which 
to  describe  the  circles,  and  cut  them  out  with  a  sharp 
knife.  You  can  cut  out  between  the  spokes,  if  you  wish, 
or  leave  them  solid.  Glue  the  wheels  to  the  cardboard, 
placing  their  centers  about  as  located  at  /  and  /,  Fig. 
172.     Four 

Mud-Guards  should  be  cut  like  Fig.  165,  with  flaps  made 
along  one  edge.     Then  bend  these  guards  around  the  tops 

of  the  wheels,  and,  after 
applying  glue  to  the  flaps, 
press  them  against  the  card- 
board side,  holding  your 
fingers  upon  the  flaps  until 
the  glue  has  dried  (see  Fig. 
1 60) .  The  guards  should  be 
placed  a  little  above  the  tops 
of  the  wheels.  Cut  four 
Lamps  like  Fig.  166  and  glue  end  K  of  two  upon  the 
front  of  the  automobile  at  L  (Fig.  172)  and  one  of  the 
other  two  upon  each  side  at  M.  These  lamps  are  shown 
in  position  in  the  illustration  of  the  completed  automobile 
(Fig.  160).     Draw  and  cut 

The  Steering-Wheel  similar  to  Fig.  167,  and,  after  pivot- 
ing it  to  the  end  of  a  strip  of  cardboard  with  a  pin  as  shown 
in  Fig.  174,  bend  the  lower  end  and  glue  it  to  the  under  side 


Fig.  173. —The  Hood. 


HOME-MADE   CLOCKWORK  TOYS  in 

of  the  cardboard  top  F  at  N  (see  Fig.  172,  also  Fig.  160). 
Make  a 

Horn  like  Fig.  168  and  glue  it  to  the  steering-wheel 
as  shown  in  Fig.  174.  A  strip  of  cardboard  about  the  size 
of  that  used  for  the  upright  of  the  steering- 
wheel  should  be  cut  for 

The  Brake,  and  glued  to  the  inside  surface 
of  the  right  side  of  the  car  at  0  (Fig.  172). 

The  Chauffeur  should  now  be  made.  Cut 
his  head  and  body  the  shape  and  size  of  Fig. 
169,  drawing  the  face  upon  each  side  with 
goggles  over  the  eyes.  Cut  the  arms  in 
two  pieces  the  shape  of  P  and  Q  (Fig.  170), 
and  then  pivot  P  to  Q  at  R  and  the  end  of 
Q  to  the  shoulder  of  the  body  at  S,  using 
thread    for    fastening    the    pieces    together. 


■Pin. 


Paint  the  hat,  coat,  sleeves,  and  gloves  a  Fs\Geer^g-whJeLe 
leather  color,  and  the  face  flesh  color.  The 
body  should  then  be  fastened  to  the  hammer  of  the  clock- 
works with  sealing-wax,  as  shown  in  Fig.  171,  while  the 
left  hand  should  be  glued  to  the  edge  of  the  steering-wheel 
and  the  right  to  the  end  of  the  brake  (see  Fig.  160).  By 
thus  attaching  the  body  to  the  end  of  the  hammer,  and 
winding  up  the  small  spring,  the  chauffeur  will  shake  vio- 
lently when  the  auto  runs  across  the  floor,  showing  the 
vibrations  of  the  machine  in  a  greatly  exaggerated  and 
amusing  manner. 

It  is  now  only  necessary  to 


112  HOME-MADE   TOYS   FOR   GIRLS   AND   BOYS 

Paint  the  Machine  to  complete  it.  The  photograph 
(Fig.  1 60)  shows  where  different  colors  are  needed.  The 
lamps,  top,  ends,  and  sides  of  the  front  portion  of  the  car 
should  be  painted  the  color  of  brass,  and  the  rest  of  the 
sides,  with  the  exception  of  a  strip  along  the  bottom  and 
the  edge  of  the  arms,  should  be  painted  vermilion.  Paint 
the  inside  of  the  car  and  the  edges  of  the  seat-arms  tan 
color,  to  represent  leather  upholstering.  With  black 
paint,  or  ink,  stripe  off  the  door  and  trimmings  upon  the 
sides  and  top  of  the  machine,  as  shown  in  Figs.  160,  172, 
and  173.  Blacken  the  brake  and  steering-wheel  and  the 
spokes  and  rims  of  the  wheels.  Along  the  bottom  of  each 
side  glue  a  strip  of  cardboard  for  the  running-boards. 

When  you  have  tired  of  your  touring-car,  you  can  easily 
convert  it  into 

An  Automobile  Delivery  Wagon,  such  as  illustrated  in 
Fig.  175.  To  make  this  you  will  require  the  same  frame 
as  that  used  for  the  touring-car,  with  the  clockworks  and 
belt-wheels  attached  in  the  same  manner.  If  you  have 
made  the  touring-car,  remove  the  cardboard  sides  from  its 
wooden  frame,  separating  the  cardboard  from  the  wood 
carefully  so  you  can  put  the  machine  together  again  when 
you  wish.  If  you  haven't  made  this  automobile,  you  will 
find  the  details  for  the  construction  of  the  frame  in  Figs. 
161  and  162,  and  the  manner  of  performing  the  work 
described  on  pages  104  to  107. 

The  Cardboard  Sides  are  much  easier  to  prepare  than 
those  for  the  touring-car,  as  they  are  straight  and  require 


HOME-MADE  CLOCKWORK  TOYS 


"3 


but  little  cutting.  The  outline  for  these  is  shown  in  Fig. 
175,  surrounding  the  drawing  of  the  completed  wagon. 
Lay  out  one  side  upon  a  piece  of  cardboard,  using  the 
dimensions  given  upon  the  drawing,  and  then  place  it  upon 
a  board  and  cut  it  out  with  your  knife.     Using  this  as  a 


Fig.  175.  — An  Automobile  Delivery  Wagon. 

pattern,  place  it  upon  another  piece  of  cardboard  and  run 
a  pencil  around  its  edges,  thus  marking  out  the  second 
side.  In  cutting  out  the  latter  piece,  run  your  knife  a  little 
inside  of  the  line  in  order  to  allow  for  the  increase  in  size 
caused  by  marking  it  out  with  the  first  cardboard  side. 
Having  prepared  the  two  sides,  draw  panels  upon  them  in 
some  such  form  as  shown  in  the  illustration,  separating 


H4  HOME-MADE  TOYS  FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 

them  with  three  lines.  Draw  a  small  window,  with  its 
top  slightly  arched,  near  the  front  edge  of  each  side,  and 
cut  an  opening  for  it  (see  illustration). 

Glue  the  sides  to  the  edges  of  the  truck  in  the  same 
manner  as  those  of  the  touring-car  were  done,  piercing 
holes  for  the  posts  of  the  clockwork  to  fit  in,  and  openings 
for  the  belt-wheels  to  project  through,  in  the  left  side. 
Cut  a  piece  of  cardboard  for  the  back  of  the  wagon,  fit  it 
between  the  sides,  and  fasten  it  in  place  by  gluing  a  number 
of  linen  strips  to  it  and  the  sides  upon  the  inner  or  unex- 
posed surfaces.  Then  cut  a  piece  of  cardboard  for  the 
roof,  making  it  about  two  inches  longer  than  the  sides,  to 
give  it  the  proper  projection  over  the  front  of  the  wagon. 
Fasten  this  piece  in  position  in  the  same  manner  as  you 
fastened  the  back  of  the  wagon. 

Make  the  floor  and  footboard  for  the  wagon  out  of  a 
piece  of  cardboard  bent  as  shown  in  Fig.  175,  and  fasten 
it  across  the  top  edges  of  the  projecting  portions  of  the  sides 
with  linen  strips.  Cut  a  strip  for  a  seat,  and  fit  it  between 
the  sides  an  inch  and  one-half  above  the  floor. 

The  Wheels  of  an  automobile  wagon  contain  fourteen 
spokes,  but  as  you  have  the  pattern  for  the  touring-car 
wheels  of  twelve  spokes,  you  can  just  as  well  use  it  in 
making  the  wagon  wheels.  They  should  be  mounted  upon 
the  sides  of  the  wagon,  a  trifle  above  the  bottoms  of  the 
spool  wheels,  as  shown  in  the  illustration,  so  they  will  not 
touch  the  carpet  when  the  machine  is  operated. 

All  Other  Portions  of  the  wagon  should  be  made  of  the 


HOME-MADE   CLOCKWORK  TOYS  115 

same  patterns  given  for  the  touring-car,  viz.  the  chauffeur 
(Figs.  169  and  170),  the  steering-wheel  (Figs.  167  and  174), 
the  brake  (Fig.  160),  and  the  lamps  (Fig.  166).  As  the 
legs  of  the  chauffeur  will  show,  it  will  be  necessary  to  cut  a 
pair  out  of  cardboard  (the  drawing  shows  the  shape  clearly 
enough  to  work  by)  and  fasten  them  to  his  body.  Fasten 
the  chauffeur  upon  the  seat  and  glue  his  left  hand  to  the 
steering-wheel,  placing  the  latter  in  front  of  him,  as  shown 
in  the  drawing.  Stick  the  lower  end  of  the  cardboard 
upright  of  the  steering-wheel  upon  a  pin  run  through  the 
wagon  floor  from  the  under  side.  Glue  the  upper  end  of 
the  brake  to  the  chauffeur's  hand  and  the  lower  end  to  the 
side  of  the  wagon. 

Paint  the  Wagon  with  water  colors,  making  the  sides, 
end,  and  roof  olive  green,  the  steering-wheel,  brake,  and 
spokes  of  wheels  black,  and  the  lamps  yellow  or  the  color 
of  brass.  In  painting  the  sides  show  the  battery  compart- 
ments upon  them  below  what  would  properly  be  the  bottom 
of  the  wagon  (see  illustration).  Leave  the  cardboard  white 
below  this  box,  as  it  represents  no  portion  of  the  machine, 
but  is  necessarily  brought  down  so  far  to  conceal  the 
wooden  frame.  It  will  give  the  machine  a  more  finished 
appearance  if,  after  painting,  you  go  over  it  with  black 
paint  and  a  fine  brush  and  stripe  the  panels  upon  the  sides, 
following  the  lines  which  you  drew  upon  them  with  a  pencil. 
Letter  the  word  "  Delivery  "  upon  the  center  panel  of 
each  side,  and  the  firm  name  in  the  small  panel  between  the 
lamp  and  window. 


n6  HOME-MADE  TOYS  FOR  GIRLS  AND   BOYS 

By  attaching  a  set  of  clockworks  in  the  same  manner  as 
described  for  the  automobiles,  you  can  make 

A  Clockwork  Railway,  constructing  the  cars  similar 
to  the  street  car  shown  in  Fig.  84,  Chapter  VI,  and  using 
the  schemes  in  the  same  chapter  for  the  tracks  and  depots. 

Each  car  should  be  provided  with  a  clockwork  motor, 
because  a  single  clockwork  is  not  strong  enough  to  pull 
more  than  one  car.  Let  me  know  how  you  succeed  in 
building  a  clockwork  railway. 


CHAPTER  XI 
HOME-MADE   ELECTRICAL   TOYS 

An  entire  volume  might  be  filled  with  plans  for  electrical 
toys  and  yet  not  exhaust  the  innumerable  forms  that  are 
within  the  ability  of  a  boy  to  construct.  There  is  room 
in  this  chapter  for  only  a  few,  and  I  have  selected  simple 
ideas,  those  that  can  be  carried  out  by  a  boy  having  no 
knowledge  of  working  with  electricity,  with  materials  that 
can  be  obtained  at  an  expenditure  of  little  or  nothing. 
Thus  every  boy  will  be  able  to  make  these  electrical  toys. 

The  Electro-Magnet  Derrick  shown  in  Fig.  176  will 
hoist  nails  and  other  small  pieces  of  hardware  from  the 
floor  to  a  table  top,  and  as  the  boom,  or  arm,  can  be  swung 
from  side  to  side,  and  raised  and  lowered,  loads  can  be 
moved  from  place  to  place  in  the  same  way  as  with  large 
derricks.  The  toy  derrick  may  be  used  for  loading  and 
unloading  toy  wagons,  carts,  and  trains  of  cars,  provided, 
of  course,  you  use  iron  or  steel  of  some  sort  for  your  loads. 
It  is  easy  enough  to  get  nails,  brads,  tacks,  and  odd  pieces 
of  hardware  for  the  purpose.  The  model  from  which  Fig. 
176  was  made  has  lifted  a  bunch  of  two  hundred  and 
eighty-four  brads  §  inch  long.  By  using  smaller  brads, 
or  tacks,  a  much  larger  number  could  be  lifted. 

117 


n8 


HOME-MADE  TOYS  FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


The  first  part  of  the  toy  to  construct  is 

The  Electro-Magnet.  The  difference  between  an  electro- 
magnet and  the  toy  variety  of  horse-shoe  magnet  with 
which  every  boy  is  familiar,  is  that  the  electro-magnet 
retains  its  magnetism  only  so  long  as  an  electric  current 


Fig.  176. — An  Electro-Magnet  Derrick. 

is  passing  around  it,  while  the  steel  magnet  retains  its 
influence  permanently,  after  being  magnetized,  unless  it 
happens  to  be  demagnetized  by  subjection  to  heat,  or  in 
some  other  way. 

Figures  177  to  179  show  the  details  for  making  a  simple 
home-made  electro-magnet. 


HOME-MADE   ELECTRICAL  TOYS 


119 


An  electro-magnet  consists  of  a  center  core  of  soft  iron, 
wrapped  with  a  coil  of  insulated  wire.  When  an  electric 
current  passes  over  a  wire,  a  magnetic  field  is  formed  around 
the  wire ;  and  when  several  turns  of  insulated  wire  are 
wrapped  about  a  soft  iron  core,  the  magnetic  fields  of  all 
the  turns  of  the  coil,  or  helix,  combine,  forming  a  very 
strong  magnetic  field  which  strongly  magnetizes  the  iron 
core.     As  I  have  said  before,  this  magnet  loses  its  mag- 


Fig.  177  Fig.  179 

Figs.  177-179. — The  Electro-Magnet. 


Fig.  178 


netic   influence    the   instant   the   current   ceases    to   pass 
through  the  surrounding  coil  of  wire. 

You  will  need  a  machine-bolt  or  carriage-bolt  i\  or  3 
inches  long,  and  \  inch  in  diameter,  for  the  core  of  the 
magnet,  some  insulated  electric-bell  wire  for  the  coil,  and 
a  piece  of  heavy  cardboard.  Cut  three  washers  of  a  trifle 
larger  diameter  than  the  bolt-head,  out  of  the  piece  of 
cardboard  (Fig.  178),  and  slip  these  over  the  bolt  as  shown 


120 


HOME-MADE   TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


in  Fig.  179  —  one  at  the  bolt-head  end,  the  other  two  at 
the  nut  end ;  then  screw  the  nut  on  to  the  end  of  the  bolt. 
Before  starting*  to  wind  the  insulated  wire  upon  the 
bolt,  pierce  two  holes  through  the  inner  cardboard  washer 
of  the  two  at  the  nut  end.  Then  stick  the  end  of  the  wire 
through  one  of  these  holes,  and  pull  a  length  of  4  or  5  inches 

of  the  wire  out  between  the 


<HOISTfNG- CABLE 


TO- BATTERY 


Fig.   180.  —  How  the  Electro-Magnet  is 
Connected  up. 


two  washers.  Starting  at 
this  end  of  the  bolt,  then, 
wind  the  wire  around  the 
bolt,  keeping  the  turns 
even  and  each  turn  pressed 
close  against  the  preceding 
turn.  When  the  washer 
at  the  head  end  of  the  bolt 
has  been  reached,  wind 
back  to  the  starting  point ; 
then  wind  back  to  the 
washer  at  the  head  a  sec- 
ond time,  and  again  back 


to  the  starting  point ;  and  so  on  until  six  or  eight  layers 
of  wire  have  been  wound  in  place.  An  even  number  of 
layers  will  bring  the  free  end  of  the  wire  back  to  the 
double- washer  end.  Slip  this  end  through  the  second 
hole  in  the  inner  washer,  and  bring  it  out  between  the 
two  washers,  as  you  did  the  first  end.  Then  screw  the 
bolt-nut  tight  against  the  washers,  to  hold  the  wire 
ends  in  place  (Fig.  177).     The   outer  cardboard  washer 


HOME-MADE   ELECTRICAL   TOYS 


121 


will  prevent  the  nut  from  charing  the  insulation  on  the 
wire  ends. 

Now  connect  the  ends  of  the  coil  to  the  binding-posts  of 
a  battery  cell,  and  you  will  be  surprised  to  find  what  a 
strong  magnet  the  head  of  the  bolt  core  has  become. 

One  end  of  the  magnet  coil  should  be  connected  to  a 
dry-cell,  and  the  other  to  a  switch ;  and  another  wire 
should  connect  the  switch  with  the  dry-cell  (Fig.  180). 

A  Home-Made  Switch  that  is  easily  made  is  shown  in 
Fig.  181.     Cut  strips  A,  B,  and  C  (Fig.  182)  from  a  tomato 


Fig.  181  Fig.  182 

Fig.  181.  —  A  Home-Made  Switch. 
Fig.  182.  —  Details  of  Switch. 


can.  Tack  the  turned  up  ends  of  A  to  a  wooden  knob  (D). 
This  forms  the  switch  lever.  Strips  B  and  C,  folded  in 
half,  and  punched  near  the  ends,  form  the  binding-post 
plates. 

Figures  181  and  182  show  how  to  mount  the  lever  and 
binding-post  plates  upon  the  switch  base.     Pivot  lever  A 


122 


HOME-MADE  TOYS  FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


Fig.  184 


with  a  small  screw  passed  through  a  hole  punched  near  its 
end,  and  through  the  hole  near  the  folded  end  of  plate  C. 
Fasten  plate  B  with  a  rug-tack  (F)  so  the  lever  will  come 
in  contact  with  it.  Screw-eyes  E  form  the  binding-posts. 
Instead  of  using  a  separate  base,   the   switch  can  be 

mounted  as  shown  in  Fig. 
176,  upon  the  base  of 

The  Derrick.  Cut  the 
base  about  8  inches  wide 
and  10  inches  long  {A, 
Fig.  176).  The  mast  (B) 
is  a  piece  of  broom-handle 
or  curtain-pole  16  inches 
long,  and  fits  loosely  in  a 
hole  bored  in  the  base. 
Figure  183  shows  a  detail 
of  the  mast.  The  pulley 
upon  its  upper  end  (C)  is 
made  of  two  spool-ends 
nailed  together  (Fig.  184), 
and  it  turns  upon  the  axle 
D,  which  slips  through 
holes  in  the  plates  E  nailed 
to  the  end  of  the  mast. 
The  lever  F  sticks  in  a  hole  in  the  mast,  close  to  the  plat- 
form. This  is  used  to  swing  the  boom  from  side  to  side. 
Screw-eye  G  is  placed  several  inches  above  F  to  serve  the 
purpose  of  a  pulley  to  guide  the  hoisting  cables. 


Fig.  183. 
Fig.  184. 
Fig.  185. 


•Detail  of  Mast. 
Detail  of  Pulley. 
Detail  of  Boom. 


HOME-MADE  ELECTRICAL  TOYS 


123 


Figure  185  shows  a  detail  of  the  boom.  Cut  the  side 
sticks  H  18  inches  long,  and  fasten  between  them  the 
separators  /,  which  should  be  just  long  enough  to  allow 
clearance  for  the  spool  pulley  J.  The  pulley  is  mounted 
on  the  axle  K.  Screw  the  lower  ends  of  the  boom  to  the 
mast,  at  a  point  2\  inches  above  the  base. 

The  Windlass  for  raising  the  derrick  boom,  and  for 
hoisting  the  loads,  is  shown  in 
detail  in  Fig.  186.  Bore  a  hole 
through  upright  L  for  the  axle 
M  to  stick  through,  and  cut 
axle  M  enough  smaller  than  the 
spool  drums  N  so  they  will  turn 
easily.  Fasten  a  crank  and  handle 
to  one  end  of  each  spool,  and  drive 
a  brad  through  each  end  of  the 
axle  to  prevent  the  drums  from 
sliding  off.  Cut  four  notches  in 
the  inner  flange  of  each  spool,  as 
shown,  and  pivot  the  catches  O 

to  the  post  L,  in  the  positions  indicated,  so  they  may  be 
thrown  into  the  notches  to  lock  the  windlass  (Fig.  176). 

The  Hoisting  Cables  should  be  made  of  strong  cord. 
Fasten  one  end  of  the  cable  for  raising  the  boom  to  a  nail 
(P,  Fig.  176),  and  run  this  cord  up  and  over  the  mast 
pulley,  then  down  through  screw-eye  G  and  over  to  one 
drum  ;  tie  it  securely  to  the  drum  so  it  will  not  slip  around. 
The  other  cable  should  be  fastened  between  the  nut  and 


Fig.  186. 


—  Detail  of  Derrick 
Windlass. 


124  HOME-MADE  TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 

washer  of  the  magnet,  as  shown  in  Fig.  180,  run  up  and 
over  the  boom  pulley  J,  then  through  screw-eye  G,  and 
tied  to  the  second  drum. 

Figure  176  shows  how  the  dry-cell  may  be  strapped  to 
the  base  board  in  front  of  the  mast,  and  how  the  wires 
that  connect  the  electro-magnet,  switch,  and  cell  should 
be  twisted  around  the  hoisting  cable,  part  way,  and  the 
remainder  of  their  length  allowed  to  hang.  Be  sure  to  cut 
the  wires  long  enough  to  reach  from  a  table-top  down  to 
the  floor.     Use  flexible  wire  if  you  can  get  it. 

By  mounting  the  base  upon  spool  wheels,  your  derrick 
can  be  moved  along  a  table-top.  Spool-ends  may  be  used 
for  the  wheels,  and  can  either  be  screwed  to  the  edge  of 
the  base,  or  be  fastened  upon  axles  as  the  wheels  of  the 
Electric  Motor  Truck  are  fastened  (Figs.  203  and  208). 

How  the  Derrick  Works.  It  is  probably  unnecessary  to 
explain  that  a  load  is  picked  up  by  throwing  over  the 
switch  lever  to  the  contact  point  and  closing  the  circuit, 
and  that  it  is  dropped  by  throwing  off  the  switch  lever 
and  opening  the  circuit  —  which  causes  the  electro-magnet 
to  lose  its  magnetism. 

A  Toy  Shocking  Machine.  The  little  shocking  machine 
shown  in  Fig.  187  is  a  harmless  toy  with  which  you  can 
have  an  endless  amount  of  fun  when  entertaining  friends. 
The  shock  it  produces  is  not  severe,  but  strong  enough  to 
make  your  friend's  arm  and  wrist  muscles  twitch,  and 
perhaps  cause  him  to  dance.  Large  shocking  coils  contract 
the  muscles  to  such  an  extent  that  it  is  impossible  to  let 


"5 


126 


HOME-MADE   TOYS   FOR   GIRLS   AND    BOYS 


go  of  the  metal  grips  until  the  current  has  been  shut  off, 
but  in  our  small  shocking  machine  the  handles  can  be 
dropped  the  instant  the  person  holding  them  wishes  to 
do  so. 

The  shocking  machine  consists  of  an  induction-coil,  an 
interrupter,  and  a  pair  of  handles,  all  of  which  are  easy  for 
a  boy  to  make,  and  a  wet  or  dry  battery  of  one  or  two  cells 
to  furnish  the  current. 

The  Induction-Coil  is  the  first  part  to  make.  This  is 
shown  in  detail  in  Figs.  188  to  191.     The  coil  has  windings 


Cardboard  Endi 
(ii"*2fB0LT 


Fig.  188  Fig.  191 

Primary 


Figs. 


Secondar^ 

Fig.  190 
191.  — Details  of  Induction-Coil. 


of  two  sizes  of  wire  upon  an  iron  core.  For  the  core  buy 
a  3^-inch  carriage-bolt  2J  inches  long,  and  for  the  wire 
coils  get  some  No.  20-  or  24-gauge  electric-bell  insulated 
copper  wire,  and  some  No.  30-gauge  insulated  magnet- 
wire.  To  keep  the  wire  from  slipping  off  the  ends  of  the 
bolt  core,   cut   two   cardboard  ends   about    \\   inches  in 


HOME-MADE  ELECTRICAL  TOYS  127 

diameter.  Slip  one  of  these  on  to  the  bolt  next  to  the  head, 
and  the  other  one  next  to  the  nut,  as  shown  in  Fig.  188. 

Three  layers  of  the  coarse  wire  should  be  wound  on  first, 
for 

The  Primary- Coil.  Pierce  a  hole  through  one  card- 
board end,  stick  the  wire  through  it,  and  allow  about  5 
inches  to  project  upon  the  outside ;  then  commence  wind- 
ing the  wire  upon  the  core,  placing  each  turn  close  to  the 
preceding  turn.  When  the  opposite  end  of  the  bolt  has 
been  reached,  wind  back  to  the  starting  point,  then  work 
back  to  the  other  end  again.  There  will  be  in  the  neigh- 
borhood of  175  turns  in  the  three  layers.  Cut  off  the  wire 
so  there  will  be  a  5-inch  projection,  and  stick  the  project- 
ing end  through  a  hole  in  the  cardboard  end.  This  com- 
pletes the  primary-coil  (Fig.  189). 

Before  winding  the  small  wire  on  top  of  the  primary- 
coil,  to  form 

The  Secondary-Coil,  wrap  the  primary-coil  with  a  layer 
of  bicycle  tape,  or  glue  several  layers  of  paper  around  the 
coil.  Then  wind  on  the  small  wire  as  you  did  the  coarser 
wire,  being  very  careful  to  get  it  on  evenly  and  smoothly. 
Wind  eleven  layers  on  the  coil,  and  run  the  end  of  the 
eleventh  layer  out  through  the  cardboard  end  (Fig.  190). 
There  should  be  about  100  turns  of  this  wire  to  the  layer, 
or  1 1 00  turns  in  all. 

A  crank  arrangement  can  be  rigged  up  to  make  the 
winding  easier,  but  with  patience,  and  by  doing  the  work 
slowly,  the  wire  can  be  wound  almost  as  well  by  hand. 


128  HOME-MADE   TOYS    FOR    GIRLS   AND   BOYS 

It  is  difficult  to  keep  track  of  each  preceding  turn,  while 
winding,  because  of  the  fineness  of  the  wire,  and  on  this 
account  it  is  a  good  scheme  to  coat  each  layer  with  bluing 
after  it  has  been  wound  on,  so  that  each  turn  of  the  follow- 
ing layer  will  show  plainly  against  the  stained  layer  be- 
neath it.     Figure  190  shows  the  complete  induction-coil. 

Cut  a  base  block  5  inches  wide  and  7  inches  long,  bevel 
the  top  edges  to  give  it  a  trim  appearance,  and  mount  the 
induction-coil  to  one  side  of  the  center  (Fig.  187),  strapping 
it  in  place  by  means  of  two  tin  straps  similar  to  that  shown 
in  Fig.  191,  cut  from  a  tin  can. 

The  projecting  ends  of  the  primary-coil  connect  with  the 
battery,  while  the  two  ends  of  the  secondary-coil  connect 
with  the  handles.  Make  three  binding-post  plates  out  of 
folded  pieces  of  tin,  similar  to  plates  B  and  C,  in  Fig.  182. 
Tack  two  of  these  to  the  end  of  the  base  and  connect  the 
secondary-coil  wires  to  them  (Fig.  187),  and  tack  the  third 
near  one  end  of  the  induction-coil  and  connect  one  primary- 
coil  wire  to  it  (Fig.  187). 

For  the  Handles  take  two  pieces  of  broom-handle  3J 
inches  long,  and  cover  each  with  a  piece  of  tin  (Fig.  192). 
The  pattern  for  the  tin  covering  (Fig.  193)  shows  how  tabs 
are  prepared  on  the  ends  and  holes  punched  through  them 
for  connecting  with  the  induction-coil.  The  connecting 
wires  should  be  5  or  6  feet  long.  Flexible  wire  is  better  than 
bell-wire  for  these,  because  it  is  more  easily  handled  in 
passing  the  handles  around.  Tack  the  tin  covering  to  the 
pieces  of  broom-handle. 


HOME-MADE   ELECTRICAL   TOYS 


129 


^ 

\ 

\ 

3f 

\\ 

v 

1" 

^°w^ 

rig-  193 

i 

Fig.  192 


Figs.  192  and  193.  —  Details  of  Shocking-Coil  Handles. 


The  purpose  of  the  induction-coil  is  to  raise  the  voltage 
of  the  battery.  The  flow  of  current  must  be  an  interrrupted 
one,  in  order  to  shock,  and  therefore 

An  Interrupter  must  be  inserted  between  the  battery 
and  one  of  the  wires  leading  to  the  primary-coil  of  the  in- 
duction-coil. There  are  several  ways  to  construct  an 
interrupter,  but 
the  scheme  which 
I  have  invented 
for  the  model  of 
this  shocking-ma- 
chine (Fig.  187) 
serves  the  purpose 
nicely,  and  is  a 
neat  appearing 
little  piece  of  ap- 
paratus. This  interrupter  is  easily  constructed  as  you  will 
see  by  the  working  details  shown  in  Figs.  194  to  198. 


•CONNECTWIREFROM 
PRIMARY-COIL 
HEREx 

Connect 
Battery 
wire 

HERE 


Fig.  194.  — Interrupter  for  Shocking-Coil. 


130  HOME-MADE   TOYS  FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 

Cut  the  base  block  A  ij  inches  wide  and  2J  inches  long. 
Make  the  shaft  B  2f  inches  long  and  of  a  diameter  equal 
to  the  hole  in  a  thread  spool ;  and  prepare  the  crank  C  to 
fit  on  the  end,  and  drive  a  brad  into  it  for  a  handle.  Fasten 
the  crank  to  the  shaft  with  glue,  or  by  driving  a  small 
brad  through  the  two.  The  shaft  supports  D  should  be 
prepared  as  shown  in  Fig.  196,  i|  inches  wide  across  the 
bottom,  f  inch  wide  at  the  top,  and  if  inches  high.  Bore 
a  hole  through  each,  a  little  below  the  top,  and  large 
enough  so  the  shaft  will  turn  easily,  and  fasten  these  sup- 
ports with  brads  to  the  sides  of  base  A.  Drive  eight  brads 
into  a  thread  spool,  spacing  them  equidistant  from  one 
another,  and  mount  this  spool  upon  the  shaft  (E,  Fig. 
194),  first  slipping  the  shaft  through  one  support,  then 
through  the  spool,  and  then  through  the  other  support. 
Drive  the  spool  brads  a  trifle  into  the  shaft  to  hold  the 
spool  in  position. 

The  projecting  arm  F  (Fig.  194)  is  a  strip  of  tin  cut  from 
a  can,  and  must  be  long  enough  so  each  nail-head  will  strike 
its  end  when  spool  E  is  revolved.  Drive  a  nail  into  base 
A,  at  G,  and,  after  bending  strip  F  as  shown  in  Fig.  198, 
fasten  it  with  brads  upon  the  top  of  an  upright  made  simi- 
lar to  H  (Fig.  197),  and  nail  this  upright  to  the  end  of 
base  A.  The  upper  end  of  strip  F  must  be  bent  so  it  will 
bear  down  upon  the  head  of  nail  G. 

The  wire  from  the  primary-coil  which  is  as  yet  not  con- 
nected should  be  attached  to  nail  G,  and  one  battery  wire 
should  be  connected  to  a  binding-post  plate  /  fastened  to 


HOME-MADE  ELECTRICAL  TOYS 


131 


the  lower  end  of  strip  F.  Figure  198  shows  how  the  bind- 
ing-post plate  is  made  out  of  a  doubled  piece  of  tin,  with  a 
hole  punched  through  it  for  a  small  binding-screw. 

This  completes  the  interrupter.  Mount  it  beside  the 
induction-coil  upon  the  base  block,  and  connect  it  with  the 
battery  and  the  induction-coil,  as  shown  in  Fig.  187.  Con- 
nect the  battery  cells  in  series.     Two  cells  will  be  enough. 


Fig.  197 


Fig.  195       Fig.  196 


Figs.  195-198.  —  Details  of  Interrupter. 

How  the  Interrupter  Works.  When  you  turn  the  crank 
of  the  interrupter,  each  nail  in  spool  E  raises  the  end  of 
strip  F,  in  passing  it,  thus  breaking  the  electrical  contact 
between  it  and  the  head  of  nail  G.  If  the  strip  has  been 
bent  properly,  it  will  spring  back  into  contact  with  the 
head  of  nail  G,  and  each  time  the  contact  is  made, 
the  person  holding  the  handles  will  receive  a  shock.  The 
strength  of  the  current  can  be  regulated  somewhat  by  the 
speed  with  which  the  interrupter  crank  is  turned.  The 
shocks  are  stronger  and  more  distinct  when  the  crank  is 
turned  slowly. 


132 


HOME-MADE   TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


Home-made  electrical  toys  of  a  light  construction  are 
easily  operated  by  a  toy  motor,  when  the  motor  and  battery 
cell  are  not  carried  by  the  toy ;  but  when  both  are  trans- 
ported, as  in  the  case  of  a  wagon,  the  construction  must  be 
very  carefully  worked  out,  or  the  motor  will  not  be  power- 
ful enough  to  drive  the  wheels. 

The  Toy  Electric  Motor  Truck  shown  in  Fig.  199  is  of 


Fig.  199.  —  A  Toy  Electric  Motor  Truck. 


light  construction,  the  axle  bearings  produce  very  little 
friction,  and  the  battery  is  light  and  of  a  powerful  type. 

Get  an  oblong  shaped  cigar-box  for  the  bed  and  sides  of 
the  truck,  several  large  thread  spools  for  wheels  and  pulleys, 
two  small  silk-thread  spools,  four  lead-pencils,  or  sticks 
whittled  perfectly  round  and  \  inch  in  diameter,  for  axles, 


HOME-MADE  ELECTRICAL  TOYS 


133 


belt-shaft,  and  steering-wheel  post,  and  six  screw-eyes  T56 
inch  in  diameter  for  the  bearings. 

First,  place  the  cigar-box  in  a  wash-boiler  or  wash-tub 
of  hot  water,  and  allow  it  to  remain  there  until  the  paper 
labels  have  soaked  off  or  loosened  sufficiently  so  they  can 
be  scraped  off  with  a  knife. 

Then,  after  the  box  has  thoroughly  dried,  cut  the  two 


Fig.  200.  — Top  view  of  Electric  Motor  Truck. 

strips  A  (Fig.  208),  and  fasten  them  to  the  bottom,  one  at 
each  side.  Screw  the  screw-eye  axle  bearings  into  these 
strips.  Place  them  at  equal  distances  from  the  ends  of 
the  strips. 

The  Wheels  are  made  from  the  flange  ends  of  the  large 
spools.  Figure  202  shows  the  front  pencil  axle.  Slip  the 
center  portion  of  one  of  the  large  spools  on  to  this  for  a 


134 


HOME-MADE  TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


Fig.  201 


Fig.  202 


pulley,  then  stick  the  pencil  ends  through  the  screw-eyes 
in  strips  A,  and  glue  the  spool-end  wheels  on  to  them. 
The  rear  axle  is  like  the  front  one,  with  the  spool  pulley 
omitted  (Fig.  203). 

The  Upper  Shaft  shown  in  Fig.   201  supports  a  spool 
pulley  like  the  one  on  the  front  axle,  and  its  screw-eye  bear- 

ings   should   be 
'73§L  screwed    into    the 

top  edge  of  the 
sides  of  the  box 
(Fig.  200),  directly 
over  the  front 
axle.  Slip  a  silk- 
spool  on  to  each 
end  of  this  shaft 
to  keep  its  ends 
from  slipping  out 
of  the  screw-eyes. 
The  Belts.  As 
you  will  see  by 
Figs.  200  to  202, 
the  upper  large  pulley  is  belted  to  the  motor  pulley,  and 
another  belt  extends  from  the  upper  shaft  down  to  the 
pulley  on  the  front  axle.  Rubber-bands  make  the  best 
belts.  Cut  a  hole  through  the  bottom  of  the  cigar-box  for 
the  belt  extending  from  the  upper  shaft  to  the  front  axle 
to  pass  through.  Screw  the  toy  motor  to  the  cigar-box 
with  its  pulley  directly  in  line  with  the  upper  shaft  pulley. 


Fig.  203 


Figs.  201-203.  —  Details  of  Axle  and  Belt  Shaft. 


HOME-MADE  ELECTRICAL  TOYS 


■35 


Wrap   the  spool  pulleys  with   bicycle-tape,    to  keep   the 
rubber-band  belts  from  slipping. 

The  Battery.  A  dry  battery  is  too  heavy  for  the  motor 
truck  to  carry  ;  so  we  must  make  a  special  two-cell  battery 
like  that  shown  in  Fig.  204.  Two  glass  tumblers  to  hold 
the  solution,  a  pair  of  battery  zincs,  a  pair  of  carbons,  and 
a  bi-chromate  of  potash  solution,  are  needed.     Old  battery 


Fig.  204.  —  Two  Home-Made  Battery  Cells  Connected  in  Series. 

zinc  pencils  with  several  inches  of  the  eaten  end  cut  off 
(Fig.  206)  will  do  for  the  zincs,  and  the  carbons  from  worn- 
out  dry-battery  cells  cut  to  a  corresponding  length  will  do 
for  the  carbons.  Fasten  together  the  zincs  and  carbons 
with  rubber-bands,  as  shown  in  Fig.  207,  after  wrapping 
a  piece  of  bicycle-tape  around  the  upper  end  of  the  carbon 
and  inserting  a  small  wad  of  it  between  the  lower  ends  of 
the  carbons  and  zincs,  to  keep  them  from  touching  one 
another. 

Figure  205  shows  a  completed  cell,  and  Fig.  204  how  the 
two  cells  are  connected  in  series,  that  is,  with  the  carbon 


i36 


HOME-MADE   TOYS  FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


MS 


CUT 
OFF 


Fig.  206 


Fig.  207 


Fig.  205 


Fig.  205.  —  A  Single  Cell. 

Figs.  206  and  207.  — Details  of  Zinc  and  Carbon. 

of  one  connected  to  the  zinc  of  the  other.  Twisting  the 
connecting  wires  into  coils,  as  shown,  is  a  good  method  of 
taking  up  the  slack. 

The  Bi-chromate  Battery  Fluid  is  made  up  of  bi-chro- 
mate  of  potash,  sulphuric  acid,  and  water,  in  the  following 
proportions : 

4  ounces  of  bi-chromate  of  potash 
4  ounces  of  sulphuric  acid 
1  quart  of  water 

In  making  up  this  solution,  first  add  the  acid  to  the  water, 
— never  add  the  water  to  the  acid,  —  and  then,  when  the 
solution  is  nearly  cool,  add  the  bi-chromate  of  potash. 
Pour  the  acid  into  the  water  slowly,  because  the  combina- 
tion of  the  two  creates  a  great  deal  of  heat,  and  if  the  heat 


HOME-MADE  ELECTRICAL  TOYS 


J37 


Fig.  209 


forms  too  quickly  your  glass  bottle  is  likely  to  split.     Label 
the  bottle  in  which  you  put  this  solution  POISON. 

As  the  bi-chromate  solution  attacks  the  zinc  element  of 
a  cell  even  when  the  current  is  not  being  drawn  upon,  the 
zinc  should  be  removed  when  the  cell  is  not  in  use. 

Amalgamating  a  Zinc  Pencil.  To  reduce  the  eating 
away  of  a  zinc  pencil  used  in  a  bi-chromate  solution,  the 
zinc  should  be  amalgamated  by  rubbing  a  thin  coat  of 
mercury  over  its  surface.  Dip  the  zinc  into  the  solution, 
first,  then  with  a  rag 
dipped  in  the  solution  rub 
the  mercury  on  to  it. 

Cut  an  opening  through 
the  cigar-box  large  enough 
for  the  two  tumblers  to  set 
in.  Then  cut  a  strip  of  tin 
about  1  inch  wide  and  8 
inches  long,  and  bend  it 
into  a  U-shaped  hanger, 
to  support  the  tumbler 
bottoms.  Slip  the  hanger 
ends  under  strips  A,  bend 
them  against  the  sides  of  the  box,  and  fasten  with  tacks 
(Figs.  208  and  209). 

Figure  200  shows  how  the  battery  cells  are  connected. 
A  small  switch  can  be  fastened  to  the  side  of  the  truck 
to  shut  off  and  turn  on  the  current,  but,  instead,  you  can 
simply  withdraw  one  pair  of  elements  from  its  tumbler  to 


Fig.  208. 
Fig.  209. 


Fig.  208 
Plan  of  Motor  Truck  Bottom. 
Section  through  Bottom. 


138 


HOME-MADE  TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


shut  off  the  current.  When  through  playing  with  the 
truck,  however,  it  is  important  to  remove  both  pairs  of 
elements  and  wash  them  off,  because  the  bi-chromate 
solution  attacks  the  zinc  elements  even  when  the  current 
is  not  in  use.  As  the  bi-chromate  solution  stains  very 
badly,  it  is  advisable  to  operate  the  motor  truck  only 
where  there  is  no  danger  of  ruining  anything  in  case  some 
of  the  solution  spills,  as  in  the  basement  or  workshop. 
If  you  wish  to  use  a  dry-cell  instead  of  the  pair  of  bi- 
chromate cells,  you  can  place  the  cell  upon  the  floor  and 
make  the  wires  connecting  it  to  the  motor  long  enough  so 
the  truck  can  run  back  and  forth  across  a  room. 

The  Seat  and  Canopy-Top  details  are  shown  in  Fig.  210. 
Make  these  in  about  the  proportion  to  the  cigar-box  shown 
in  Fig.  199.  Fasten  the  seat  to  the  edge  of  the  seat-back 
B  with  glue  and  brads,  and  then  fasten  the  side  pieces  A 
to  the  ends  of  the  seat.     The  dashboard  E  is  nailed  to  the 


Fig.  210. —  Details  of  Seat  and  Canopy- Top. 


HOME-MADE  ELECTRICAL  TOYS  139 

bottom  piece  D,  and  D  is  nailed  to  the  lower  ends  of  side 
pieces  A.  Figure  211  shows  the  pattern  for  the  canopy- 
top.  Make  it  of  light-weight  cardboard,  or  heavy  writing- 
paper.     Slash  the  ends  as 

shown ;    then  turn  down      -j  p~  8"  ~*\ 

the  corners,  and  lap  and 
glue  them  to  form  the 
turned-down  canopy 
ends.      Fasten    the    ends 


tO     the     Canopy     Uprights  Fig.  211. -Pattern  of  Canopy-Top. 

with  tacks. 

The  Seat-Arms  are  pieces  of  bent  wire,  with  their  ends 
stuck  into  holes  in  the  canopy  uprights  and  front  edge  of 
the  seat. 

The  Steering-Wheel  is  a  section  of  a  spool  |  inch  thick, 
and  is  glued  upon  the  end  of  a  pencil  or  a  stick.  Run  the 
lower  end  of  the  pencil  through  a  hole  in  the  bottom  of  D 
(Fig.  210).     For 

The  Levers,  fasten  two  small  sticks  to  the  end  of  the 
bottom  piece  D  with  small  staples. 


CHAPTER   XII 

A   HOME-MADE   TOY   SHOOTING   GALLERY 

This  interesting  toy,  with  its  funny  animal  targets,  and 
a  harmless  pistol  with  which  to  shoot  at  them,  will  provide 


Fig.  212. — The  Completed  Toy  Shooting  Gallery. 

an  endless  amount  of  fun  for  a  winter's  evening  or  stormy 
afternoon. 

140 


A  HOME-MADE  TOY  SHOOTING   GALLERY  141 

Figure  212  shows  the  completed  toy,  and  Fig.  213  the 
box  that  forms 

The  Framework.  The  targets  can  be  arranged  to  suit 
the  form  of  box  that  you  find,  and  the  number  may  be 
increased  or  decreased  to  suit  the  space. 


Fig.  213. — The  Box  Framework. 

The  right  position  for  the  box  is  upon  its  side  so  its 
open  top  forms  the  front  of  the  target  box  (Fig.  213). 
The  horizontal  piece  A  (Fig.  213)  is  fastened  between  the 
ends  of  the  box,  to  support  targets.  It  is  held  in  place 
by  nails  driven  through  the  box  ends  into  its  ends.  If 
your  box  is  much  larger  than  the  one  shown  in  the  illus- 


142 


HOME-MADE   TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


tration,  you  can  provide  two  crosspiece  supports  for  tar- 
gets, instead  of  one. 

The  Circular  Target  should  be  drawn  upon  a  piece  of 
cardboard  with  a  compass,  or,  by  marking  around  a  cup 

or  small  saucer  to 
make  the  outer  cir- 
cle, marking  around 
a  can  cover  for  the 
second  circle,  and  a 
coin  for  the  center 
circle.  Blacken  the 
Cloth -hinge  outside  and  center 
rings  with  ink,  or 
by  rubbing  with  a 
soft  pencil. 

Figure  214  shows 
how  the  target 
should  be  hinged  in 
place  to  the  hori- 
zontal strip  A. 
Tack  or  glue  the 
lower  edge  of  the 
piece  of  cardboard  to 
a  block   of  wood  B. 


Fig.  215 

Cloth  Hi ng 

Figs.  214-215.  —  Details  of  Targets. 


Then  cut  a  hinge-strip  out  of  a  piece  of  dress  lining,  and 
either  tack  or  glue  one-half  of  it  to    block    B    and    the 
other  half  to  the  target  support  A. 
The  Animal  Targets  are  made  with  pictures  cut   from 


A  HOME-MADE   TOY   SHOOTING   GALLERY 


:43 


magazines  and  newspapers.  The  pictures  should  be 
colored  with  crayons  or  water-colors,  to  make  them  as 
nearly  like  their  right  colors  as  possible. 

After  cutting  out  the  pictures,  paste  them  upon  card- 
board, mount  the  pieces  of  cardboard  upon  blocks  of 
wood,  as  shown  at  B  and  C  (Figs.  214  and  215),  and  hinge 
the  blocks  to  the  target  supports  with  cloth  strips.  B 
shows  the  method  of  hinging  the  targets  to  strip  A,  and 
to  the  lower  side 
of  the  box,  and  C 
shows  the  method 
of  hinging  the 
targets  to  the 
ends  of  the  box. 
The  former  tar- 
gets fall  back- 
wards when 
struck ;    the  latter  targets  swing  sideways  when  struck. 

Figure  216  shows 

The  Card-Shooting  Pistol,  and  Figs.  217,  218,  and  219 
show  the  details  for  making  it.  Cut  block  A  about  8 
inches  long,  and  block  B  about  3  inches  long.  Nail  A  to 
B  as  shown.  Then  take  two  rubber-bands,  loop  them 
together  end  to  end,  as  shown  in  Fig.  218,  and  fasten  one 
end  of  the  looped  bands  to  the  end  of  block  A  by  means 
of  a  nail  driven  into  the  block  and  bent  over  as  shown  in 
Fig.  217.  Cut  a  piece  of  cardboard  about  1  inch  square, 
notch  the  center  of  two  opposite  edges  (Fig.  219),  and  fit 


Fig.  216.— The  Card-Shooting  Pistol. 


144 


HOME-MADE   TOYS   FOR   GIRLS   AND   BOYS 


the  loop  of  the  free  end  of  the  rubber-bands  over  the  piece 
of  cardboard  and  into  the  notches,  as  shown  in  Figs.  217 
and  218.     This  completes  the  pistol. 

The  toy  pistol  shoots  small  squares  of  cardboard,  placed 
in  it  as  shown  in  Figs.  216  and  218,  with  one  corner  slipped 

beneath    the    rubber- 
band  loop. 

Number  the  Tar- 
gets as  shown  in  Fig. 
212,  marking  the  cir- 
cular target  "  25,"  four 
of  the  animal  targets 
"  10,"  and  the  re- 
maining four  "  5." 
Each  number  repre- 
sents the  score  of 
that  particular  target. 
When  Shooting,  stand  3  or  4  feet  away  from  the  target 
box.  Aim  at  the  circular  target,  because  that  one  counts 
the  most.  If  you  miss  it,  there  is  the  chance,  of  course, 
of  hitting  one  of  the  other  targets  below  or  to  one  side  of 
it  and  making  a  smaller  score. 


Figs.  217-219. 


Fig.  218 
Detail  of  Card-Shooting  Pistol. 


CHAPTER   XIII 
A  HOME-MADE  DOLL-HOUSE 

There  is  nothing  more  interesting  to  build  than  a  doll- 
house,  and  the  construction  is  within  the  ability  of  the 
average  girl.  If  brother  is  willing  to  lend  a  hand  with 
the  carpenter  work  so  much  the  better.  Sister  can  attend 
to  the  finishing  and  furnishing,  which  are  important  parts 
of  the  work  that  she  can  do  more  handily  than  a  boy  can. 
But  there  is  no  reason  why  either  a  girl  or  boy  cannot 
undertake  a  doll-house  like  that  shown  in  Figs.  220  and 
221,  and  carry  the  work  to  a  successful  completion,  by 
carefully  following  the  instructions  and  diagrams  in  this 
chapter. 

The  Building  Material.  The  doll-house  in  the  photo- 
graphs was  built  of  packing  cases.  You  can  buy  these  at 
a  dry-goods  store  at  15  or  20  cents  apiece. 

The  Floor  Plans  are  shown  in  Figs.  222,  223,  and  224. 
Your  boxes  may  make  it  necessary  to  alter  the  dimensions 
given,  but  that  will  be  simple  to  do.     Patterns  for 

The  Partitions  are  shown  in  Figs.  225  and  226.  In 
cutting  the  second-floor  partitions  (Fig.  226),  miter  one  edge 
of  E  and  F  to  allow  for  the  bedroom  door  opening,  shown 
upon  the  plan,  and  miter  the  edges  of  G  to  fit  between 

MS 


146  HOME-MADE   TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 

them  above  the  door.  The  mitering  is  shown  in  the  draw- 
ings (Fig.  226). 

Besides  cutting  a  stair  opening  in  the  second  floor, 
make  an  opening  three  by  five  inches  in  the  second  and 
third  floors  for 

The  Elevator-Shaft.  Care  must  be  taken  to  have  these 
openings  exactly  over  one  another.  Make  the  opening 
in  the  second  floor  six  by  eight  inches  in  the  place  indi- 
cated upon  the  plan.  This  will  allow  for  the  elevator  shaft 
and  stairway.  No  stairway  has  been  built  to  the  third 
story,  as  the  elevator  serves  the  purpose,  and  one  would 
take  up  too  much  of  the  ball-room  space. 

The  Side  Walls  should  measure  nineteen  inches  wide 
by  twenty-four  inches  high,  and  the  other  two  walls  thirty 
inches  wide  by  twenty-four  inches  high.     That  portion  of 

The  Rear  Wall  enclosing  the  kitchen  and  bath-room  is 
hinged  to  open  (see  Fig.  222),  and 

The  Front  Wall  is  made  in  two  sections,  each  hinged 
to  a  strip  of  wood  an  inch  and  one-half  wide  nailed  to  the 
two  edges  of  the  house,  as  shown  in  Fig.  220. 

The  Windows  are  four  by  five  inches,  so  four-by-five 
camera  plates  can  be  used  for  the  glass. 

The  Roof  had  best  be  made  in  two  sections,  each  meas- 
uring twenty-eight  inches  long  by  twenty-four  inches  wide. 
Fasten  the  boards  together  with  battens  on  the  under  side 
and,  after  mitering  the  upper  edge  of  each,  nail  them  to 
the  house  so  that  the  ridge  is  fifteen  inches  above  the  third 
floor.     Then   nail   a   board   nineteen  inches  long  by  ten 


Fig.  220.     The  Home-Ma dk  I)oll-H< 


1     Fig.  221.    Interior  View  of  Doll-House. 


LivirsiG 
Room 


m 


p 


Kitchen 


Haul  Room 


y  T^Srfi 


rr 


— 



_,r A 

\ 

1 
j 

A 

.1 

0) 

1 
j 

1 

1 

M'+-4- 

! 13" * 

Fig  222  First-floor  Pla/n 


3  0' 


Bed  Room 


Bath       :ro 

Room       i 


r^-p 


io"    — ^fl—*-   b" 


G// 

'}'  Bed  Room  2 
I 

;*  —  iz"  — 4- 


t  ! 


9- f.  4--^| 


4" 4-  4"  4-    5"   -4-  4-"  4 5"—±-  4  "-4-  A" -J 

Fig  223  Second  Floor  Plam 


Fig  225   1 
First  Floor  Paetitioms 
I 

T 
j 

o 


Lime  of  Roof 


H— 

-  is" 4 

D 

1 
.1 

'CD 

1 

i 

k-2^ 

I—  4'^ 

\ 13" H 

i 


k-4£- 

F 

1 
1 

L_4^] 

gTTF^ 


a 


Fig  226 

Second 

Floor 

Partitioms 


Fig  224  THIRD  Fl_OOR  PlAM' 

Figs.  222-226.  — Plans  of  Doll-House  and  Patterns  for  Partitions. 
147 


148 


HOME-MADE   TOYS   FOR   GIRLS   AND   BOYS 


inches  wide  in  the  peak  of  the  roof  (D  in  Fig.  228),  and  a 
narrow  strip  three  inches  from  each  side  wall  (K  and  L 
in  Fig.   224).     These  cut  off  the  triangular  shape  of  the 

ball-room  and  give  it  a  better  ap- 
pearance. 

The  Chimney  is  a  solid  block 
of  wood  with  narrow  strips  nailed 
to  all  sides  near  the  top  (Fig.  227). 
Make  it  eight  or  ten  inches  long, 
and  cut  off  the  bottom  to  fit  the 
slant  of  the  roof.  Paint  the  block 
red,  and  mark  off  the  mortar  joints 
in  white. 

An  Elevator  is  something  which 
is  found  in  but  few  doll-houses. 
It  was  built  in  this  house,  think- 
ing it  might  please  the  young  mis- 
tress, and  it  proved  such  a  success 
that  the  scheme  has  been  worked 
out  carefully  in  Figs.  228,  229, 
230,  231,  and  232,  that  you  may 
include  it  in  the  house  you  build. 
The  cutting  of  the  elevator-shaft 
has  already  been  described.  For  material,  procure  two 
small  pulleys  such  as  is  shown  in  Fig.  230,  four  feet  of 
brass  chain,  six  feet  of  No.  12  wire,  half  a  dozen  double- 
pointed  tacks  or  very  small  screw-eyes,  a  short  piece  of 
lead  pipe,  and  a  cigar-box.     Make 


Fig.  227.  — The  Chimney. 


Fig.  229 


Fig.  230 


Fig.  231 


ouble  Pointed 
Tack 


Fig.  232 


Fig.  228.  —  Front  View  of  Elevator-Shaft 
and  Stairs. 


Figs.  229-232.  —  Details  of  the  Elevator. 
149 


150  HOME-MADE  TOYS  FOR   GIRLS   AND   BOYS 

The  Car  out  of  the  cigar-box,  cutting  it  down  to  two 
and  one-quarter  inches  wide,  three  and  three-quarters 
inches  deep,  and  seven  inches  high  (see  Fig.  231).  Place 
two  of  the  double-pointed  tacks  or  screw-eyes  in  each  side 
of  the  car  for  the  guide-wires  to  run  through  and  another 
in  the  center  of  the  top  from  which  to  attach  the  brass 
chain. 

The  Guide- Wires  are  made  of  very  heavy  wire  that  will 
not  bend  easily.  Cut  two  of  a  length  to  reach  from  the 
first  floor  to  the  ball-room  ceiling,  and  after  running  them 
through  the  tacks  in  the  sides  of  the  car,  stick  their  ends 
into  small  holes  bored  at  E,  F,  G,  and  H  (Fig.  228).  The 
upper  holes  should  be  bored  through  the  ball-room  ceil- 
ing, while  the  lower  ones  need  be  bored  but  part  way 
through  the  first  floor.  Care  must  be  taken  to  have 
these  holes  in  the  correct  position,  so  the  elevator  will 
run  up  and  down  upon  the  wires  without  striking  the  sides 
of  the  shaft.  The  easiest  way  of  fastening  the  wires  in 
place  is  to  run  the  upper  ends  through  the  holes,  until  the 
lower  ends  can  be  set  into  their  sockets,  and  then  drive 
two  double-pointed  tacks  over  the  top  of  each  wire,  as 
shown  at  E  and  F  in  Fig.  228. 

Now  run  the  elevator  up  to  the  top  of  the  shaft,  and 
mark  upon  the  ceiling  where  the  screw-eye  in  the  top  of 
the  car  strikes.  At  this  point  bore  a  hole  through  the 
ceiling  and  two  inches  back  of  it  bore  another  hole,  through 
which  to  run  the  weight-chain.  When  this  has  been  done, 
cut  a  short  block  of  wood  to  fit  the  peak  of  the  roof  and 


A  HOME-MADE   DOLL-HOUSE 


!5i 


Screw  the  Pulleys  into  it  two  inches  apart  (Fig.  229). 
Fit  the  block  in  the  peak  of  the  roof,  centering  the  front 
pulley  over  the  top  of  the  car  as  nearly  as  possible,  and 
drive  a  couple  of  nails  through  the  roof  boards  into  it  to 
hold  it  in  place  temporarily.     Then 

Attach  the  Chain  to  the  tack  in  the  top  of  the  car,  slip 
a  piece  of  lead  pipe  about  an  inch  long  over  the  chain, 
allowing  it  to  set  on  the  top  of  the  car  to  make  the  latter 
heavier  (Fig.  231),  and  run  the  chain  up  through  the  first 
hole  in  the  ceiling,  over  the  pulleys,  and  down  through 
the  second  hole.  To  the  end  of  the  chain  attach  a  piece 
of  lead  pipe  for 

The  Counter-balance  (C,  Fig.  232).  This  should  be 
just  heavy  enough  to  make  a  perfect  balance  between 
it  and  the  car,  which  can  be  obtained  by  whittling  off 
the  end  of  the  pipe  until  the  weight  of  the  two  is  the  same. 
Make  the  chain  of  sufficient  length  so  the  weight  will  rest 
upon  the  first  floor  when  the  car  is  at  the  third  floor. 
You  can  now  tell  whether  or  not  the  pulleys  are  in  the 
right  positions.  When  they  have  been  adjusted  properly, 
nail  the  block  firmly  in  place. 

The  Gable-Ends.  The  front  gable-end  consists  of  four 
pieces  (A,  B,  C,  and  D,  in  Fig.  233),  the  dimensions  for 
the  cutting  of  which  are  given  in  the  illustration.  After 
preparing  these,  nail  A,  B,  and  C  in  their  proper  positions 
in  the  gable  of  the  roof,  and  trim  the  edges  of  Z>,  if  they 
need  it,  to  fit  between.  To  prevent  the  movable  section 
from  pushing  in  too  far,  it  will  be  necessary  to  nail  a  narrow 


152 


HOME-MADE   TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


strip  of  wood  to  the  roof  and  third  floor,  just  inside  of  it. 
The  rear  gable  is  made  in  one  piece,  and  is  fastened  in 
place  permanently. 

The  movable  gable  and  all  hinged  portions  should  have 


Fig.  233. — The  Front  Gable-End. 

Spring-Catches  with  which  to  shut  up  and  lock  the 
house  (see  the  illustrations). 

The  Stairway  is  shown  in  Fig.  228,  and  the  details  for  its 
construction  will  be  found  in  Figs.  234,  235,  236,  237.  This 
stairway  is  made  in  two  parts,  with  a  platform  between. 
Cut  a  block  of  wood  the  shape  and  size  shown  in  Fig.  234 
for  the  platform,  with  notches  at  A  and  B  for  the  tops  of 
the  lower  stringers  to  fit  in.     Then 

Prepare  Two  Stringers  of  thirteen  steps  similar  to  Fig.  235, 
and  two  stringers  of  five  steps  similar  to  Fig.  236,  laying  off 
the  steps  by  means  of  a  cardboard  pattern,  or  pitch-board,  of 
the  size  shown  in  Fig.  237.  After  cutting  out  these  pieces, 
fasten  the  tops  of  the  lower  stringers  in  the  notches  A  and  B 
in  the  platform,  and  nail  the  platform  in  its  proper  position  in 


A  HOME-MADE   DOLL-HOUSE 


153 


CO 

Id 

U 

s 

h 

CO 

W 

o 
J 


en 

CN 


3"- 


Fig  234. 
Stair  -Platform 

3"  SgUAKE- 


lot    A' 


/or-Sfr/n^ers-^B  I  C 


m 


Fig  237. 
PrrcH  -Board 


Fig  236. 
UpPtt. 
Stri/ngees 

Figs.  234-237.  —  Details  of  Stairs. 


the  corner  of  the  hall. 
When  this  has  been 
done,  nail  the  bot- 
toms of  the  upper 
stringers  (E  in  Fig. 
236)  to  the  sides  of 
the  platform  at  C  and 
D  (Fig.  234),  and  set 
the  tops  in  notches 
cut  in  the  edge  of 
the  second  floor. 

The  Treads  and 
Risers  of  the  steps 
—  the  horizontal  and 
vertical  boards  — 
should  be  cut  out  of 
cigar-box  wood. 

Cut 

The  Newel-Posts 
out  of  short  square 
blocks,  and 

The  Hand-Rails 
out  of  strips  of 
cigar-box  wood. 
Make  a  groove  in 
the  under  side  of  the 
hand-rails  to  re- 
ceive the  ends  of 


154  HOME-MADE   TOYS   FOR   GIRLS   AND   BOYS 

The  Balusters,  or  spindles.  Toothpicks  are  of  just  the 
right  size  for  balusters. 

The  delicate  portions  of  the  stairways  should  be  glued 
in  place.  Make  slits  in  the  stair  treads  to  stick  the  bottoms 
of  the  balusters  in. 

The  Front  Steps  are  clearly  shown  in  Fig.  220.  Make 
the  solid  balustrades  out  of  pieces  of  box  board,  and  the 
step  treads  and  risers  out  of  cigar-box  wood.  Prepare  the 
rear  steps  in  the  same  way. 

Cut  the  Window  Openings  in  the  places  indicated  upon 
the  plans  (Figs.  222  to  224)  and  the  photographs.  First 
bore  holes  in  the  four  corners  of  each  window  space ;  then 
saw  from  hole  to  hole  with  a  compass-saw. 

Old  camera  plates  are  excellent  material  for 

The  Window  Glass.  Fasten  the  glass  in  the  openings 
with  small  brads  in  the  same  way  that  glass  is  fastened  in 
picture-frames,  and  putty  it  in  the  same  way  that  window 
glass  is  puttied,  to  hold  it  firm. 

The  Front  and  Rear  Doors  can  be  painted  upon  the 
front  of  the  house.     Openings  are  not  necessary. 

The  Outside  Trimmings.  Strips  of  cigar-box  wood 
should  be  cut  up  for  the  outside  door  and  window  casings, 
and  be  tacked  around  the  openings  as  shown  in  Fig.  220. 
Nail  a  molding  or  a  plain  strip  of  wood  to  the  front  edge 
of  the  third  floor,  as  shown  in  Fig.  220. 

Castors  will  make  it  easier  to  move  the  doll-house  about. 
Cut  four  blocks  of  wood,  fasten  a  castor  to  each,  and  nail 
one  block  inside  each  corner  of  the  foundation  frame. 


A  HOME-MADE   DOLL-HOUSE  155 

The  Interior  Woodwork.  Cigar-boxes  make  excellent 
hardwood  floors.  Fit  the  pieces  close  together  and  fasten 
with  small  brads. 

Make  the  door  and  window  casings,  picture-moldings, 
and  base-boards  out  of  strips  of  cigar-box  wood. 

After  completing  the  carpenter  work  of  the  house, 

Set  the  Nail-Heads,  — ■  that  is,  drive  them  below  the 
surface  of  the  wood,  —  putty  these  holes  and  all  cracks 
and  other  defective  places,  and  sandpaper  rough  surfaces. 

Paint  the  House  a  cream  color,  with  white  trimmings 
and  a  green  roof.  Stripe  the  foundation  walls  to  indicate 
courses  of  stone  work.  Paint  the  front  door  a  mahogany 
color,  with  panels  indicated  upon  it,  and  make  the  rear 
door  white.  The  painting  of  the  chimney  has  already 
been  described. 

The  inside  walls  should  be  finished  as  suggested  in 
Chapter  XIV.  The  woodwork  may  be  oiled,  or  painted 
with  white  enamel  or  any  other  color  desired. 

A  Colonial  Doll-House  with  a  number  of  features  not 
included  in  this  house  is  described  and  illustrated  in 
Chapter  V  of  "  The  Boy  Craftsman." 


CHAPTER  XIV 
FURNISHING  THE  HOME-MADE  DOLL-HOUSE 

With  the  carpenter  work  of  a  doll-house  completed, 
the  finishing  of  the  inside,  — ■  wall  papering  and  painting, 
—  and  selecting  of  furnishings  for  the  various  rooms, 
remain  to  be  done.  This  requires  as  much  care  as  the 
building  of  the  house,  and  while  any  boy  can  do  the  work, 
the  help  of  a  sister  will  perhaps  simplify  matters  and  give 
to  the  rooms  a  daintier  appearance. 

The  Walls  and  Ceiling  of  the  kitchen  and  bath-room 
should  be  painted  with  white  lead  or  white  enamel.  For 
the  other  rooms  select  paper  having  a  small  design,  such 
as  is  to  be  found  on  most  ceiling  papers.  If  you  have 
ever  watched  the  paper-hanger  at  work,  you  have  noticed 
he  puts  on  the  ceiling  first,  allowing  the  paper  to  run 
down  the  walls  a  little  way  all  around  instead  of  trim- 
ming it  off.  Then  he  hangs  the  wall  paper,  and  if  there 
is  no  border  to  cover  the  joints  of  the  ceiling  and  wall 
papers  he  carries  the  wall  paper  up  to  the  ceiling.  Use 
flour  paste  to  stick  on  the  paper,  and  a  cloth  or  photo- 
graph-print roller  to  smooth  out  the  wrinkles.  The  din- 
ing-room should  have  a  wainscot  of  dark  paper  below  the 
chair-rail,  and  a  paper  with  little  or  no  figure  upon  it  above. 

156 


FURNISHING  THE   HOME-MADE   DOLL-HOUSE        157 

All  Hardwood  Floors,  the  stairs,  door  and  window 
casings,  baseboards,  and  picture  moldings  should  be 
varnished  thoroughly  or  given  several  coats  of  boiled 
linseed-oil. 

All  floors,  with  the  exception  of  the  kitchen,  bath-room, 
and  hardwood  floors,  should  be  fitted  with 

Carpets.  If  you  do  not  happen  to  have  suitable  scraps 
on  hand,  they  can  be  procured  at  almost  any  furnishing 
store  where  they  make  up  carpets.  Select  pieces  with  as 
small  patterns  as  possible.  The  floors  of  the  bath-room 
and  kitchen  should  be  covered  with  oilcloth. 

Rugs  for  the  hardwood  floors  may  be  made  out  of  scraps 
of  carpet. 

Window-Shades  may  be  made  for  each  window  out  of 
linen,  and  tacked  to  the  top  casing  so  that  the  bottom  of 
the  curtain  reaches  just  above  the  center  of  the  opening. 
Each  window  should  also  have 

Lace  Curtains  made  out  of  scraps  of  lace.  They  should 
either  be  tacked  above  the  windows  or  hung  upon  poles 
made  out  of  No.  12  wire,  cut  in  lengths  to  fit  the  windows. 
Screw  small  brass  hooks  into  the  top  window-casings  for 
the  poles  to  hang  upon. 

Handsome  Portieres  for  the  doorways  can  be  made  with 
beads  and  with  the  small  hollow  straws  sold  for  use  in 
kindergartens.     For  the 

Bead  Portieres,  cut  threads  as  long  as  the  height  of  the 
door  and  string  the  beads  upon  them,  alternating  the 
colors  in  such  a  way  as  to  produce  patterns.     Then  tie 


158  HOME-MADE   TOYS  FOR   GIRLS   AND   BOYS 

the  strings  together  to  a  piece  of  wire  the  width  of  the 
doorway,  and  fasten  the  wire  in  the  opening.     The 

Straw  Portieres  are  made  similarly. 

From  magazine  illustrations  you  can  select 

Suitable  Pictures  for  each  room,  but  if  you  are  handy 
with  brush  and  pencil  you  may  prefer  to  make  the  pictures 
yourself.  These  may  be  mounted  upon  cardboard  and 
have  their  edges  bound  with  passe-partout  paper  to  give 
the  effect  of  frames,  or  frames  may  be  cut  out  of  card- 
board and  pasted  to  them.  Hang  the  pictures  to  the 
picture  molding  with  thread. 

A  Cosey-Corner  may  be  fitted  up  in  the  ball-room  by 
■fastening  a  strip  of  a  cigar-box  in  one  corner  an  inch  and 
one-half  above  the  floor  for  the  seat,  and  hanging  draperies 
on  each  side  of  it.  Pillows  may  be  made  for  it  out  of 
scraps  of  silk  stuffed  with  cotton. 

A  doll-house  properly  proportioned  in  every  detail,  in- 
cluding the  selection  of  its  furniture,  is  pleasing  to  look  at, 
and  is  to  be  desired  much  more  than  some  of  the  speci- 
mens to  be  found  in  the  stores.  These  very  often  have 
parlor  chairs  larger  than  the  mantel,  beds  that  either  fill 
two-thirds  of  the  bedroom  space  or  are  so  small  they  are 
hidden  from  view  by  the  chairs,  and  other  furniture  ac- 
cordingly, all  having  been  selected  without  any  thought  as 
to  size  or  fitness. 

Care  must  be  taken,  in  buying  the  furniture,  to  have 
the  pieces  suitable  to  the  rooms.  It  will  no  doubt  require 
more  time  than  to  purchase  the  first  sets  you  come  across, 


FURNISHING  THE   HOME-MADE   DOLL-HOUSE         159 

but  when  you  have  completed  the  selections,  the  result 
will  be  a  much  better  appearing  doll-house. 

By  carefully  searching  the  toy-shops  you  are  almost 
certain  of  rinding  what  you  want  for  the  various  rooms, 
as  about  everything  imaginable  in  furniture  has  been 
manufactured.  Porcelain  bath-tubs,  wash-basins  with 
real  faucets  and  running  water,  gilt  furniture,  chande- 
liers, and  such  articles  are  tempting  to  buy.  But  it  is 
rather  expensive  to  fit  up  a  house  in  this  way,  for,  though 
each  piece  may  not  amount  to  very  much,  they  count  up 
very  quickly. 

The  suggestions  for  the  making  of  cigar-box  furniture 
in  Chapter  XVII,  and  spool  and  cardboard  furniture  in 
Chapter  XIX,  will  give  you  plenty  of  material  for  furni- 
ture and  save  you  the  expense  of  buying  this  part  of  the 
furnishings  for  your  house. 


CHAPTER  XV 

A   HOME-MADE  TOY  STABLE 

The  stable  illustrated  in  Figs.  238  and  239  is  designed 
in  keeping  with  the  doll-house  in  Chapter  XIII.  It  is 
shown  in  the  background  of  the  photograph  of  this  doll- 


Fig.  238.  —  Exterior  of  Stable. 

house  (Fig.  220).  If  you  prefer  a  garage  instead  of  this 
stable,  you  may  omit  the  stalls,  and  make  one  or  two 
large  windows  in  the  rear  wall  in  place  of  the  small  high 
windows    shown.     The    building's    construction    is    very 

160 


A   HOME-MADE   TOY    STABLE 


161 


simple.  The  dimensions  are :  width,  twenty- four  inches  ; 
depth,  twelve  inches  ;  and  height,  twenty-two  inches.  The 
barn  contains  five  stalls  on  the  ground  floor  and  a  hay-loft 
above. 

To  build  the  stable  according  to  the  drawings,  a  box 
ten  by  twelve  by  twenty-four  inches  should  be  procured  for 


Fig.  239.  —  Interior  of  Stable. 

The  First  Story.  If  you  have  a  box  of  different  pro- 
portions it  will  be  a  simple  matter  to  make  such  altera- 
tions in  the  details  as  it  will  require. 

The  Roof  is  made  in  two  sections,  each  fifteen  by  eigh- 
teen inches,  and  is  fastened  to  the  top  of  the  box  so  that 
the  peak  is  twenty-two  inches  above  the  bottom. 

The  Gable-End  is  made  in  four  pieces,  as  shown  in  Fig. 


162 


HOME-MADE  TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


240,  A,  B,  and  C,  to  be  nailed  in  place,  and  D  to  be  mov- 
able as  in  the  case  of  the  doll-house.  Make  a  three-by- 
five-inch  window  in  the  center  of  D,  and  fasten  the  glass 


—3- — a 


Fig.  240.  —  Front  Gable-End. 

in  place  with  strips  cut  as  described  in  Chapter  XIII. 
Strips  should  be  nailed  to  the  roof  just  inside  of  the  mov- 
able section  to  prevent  the  latter  from  setting  in  too  far, 
and  a  spring  catch  fastened  to  C  and  D  as  shown,  to  hold 

the  movable  section 
in  place. 

Figure  241  gives 
the  patterns  and 
measurements  for 

The  Stall  Parti- 
tions, four  of  which 
should  be  cut  out 
and  fastened  to  the 


Fig.  241.  —  Stall  Partitions. 


floor  of  the  stable  four  inches  apart,  or  so  they  will  divide 
the  inside  width  into  five  equal  stalls. 

The  Feed-Troughs  are  made  out  of  two  strips  of  cigar- 


A  HOME-MADE   TOY    STABLE 


163 


boxes  fitted  between  the  stalls,  as  shown  in  Figs.  239  and 
241,  and  are  fastened  in  place  by  means  of  brads  and  glue. 
Above  the  stalls  cut 

Small  Windows  an  inch 
and  one-half  square  in  the 
rear  wall.  These  are  the 
ventilating  windows  for  the 
stalls,  and  may  be  left  open. 

Figure  242  shows  the 
construction  of 

A  Ladder  to  the  hay-loft. 
This  is  made  out  of  two 
sticks  twelve  inches  long, 
with  strips  of  cigar-boxes 
two  inches  long  glued  to 
them  half  an  inch  apart, 
as  shown  in  the  drawing. 
Cut  away  a  section  of  the 
hay-loft  floor  two  inches 
square  and  stick  the  end 
of  the  ladder  up  through 
the  opening,  fastening  the 
uprights  to  the  edge  of 
the  floor  (see  Fig.  242). 

A    stick    about    three 
inches  long,  with  a  very  small  pulley  attached  near  the 
end,  should  be  fastened  in  the  peak  of  the  roof  for  a 

Feed-Hoist  (see  Fig.  238). 


Fig.  242.  — Ladder  to  Hay-Loft. 


1 64  HOME-MADE   TOYS   FOR   GIRLS   AND   BOYS 

The  first  story  has 

A  Drop-Front,  as  shown  in  Figs.  238  and  239.  This  is 
made  from  the  box-cover.  Fasten  the  boards  together 
with  battens  placed  upon  the  inside,  and  hinge  it  to  the 
bottom  of  the  stable.  Nail  two  cleats  to  the  under  side 
of  the  floor  (see  Fig.  238)  to  lift  it  off  the  ground  just 
enough  to  allow  the  front  to  drop  without  springing  its 
hinges. 

When  the  front  is  down  it  forms  an  incline  upon  which 
to  run  the  horses  into  the  stable.  For  this  reason  it  is 
not  advisable  to  cut  an  opening  in  it,  but  merely 

Represent  a  Stable  Door  on  the  outside  (see  Fig.  238). 
This  is  done  with  paint  and  a  fine  brush.  First  paint 
a  green  panel  in  the  center  of  the  front,  and  then  mark 
off  a  couple  of  panels  within  this  space  with  black  paint, 
and  stripe  them  diagonally  to  represent  beaded-boards. 

With  strips  of  wood  half  an  inch  wide  make 

A  Simple  Trim  around  the  door,  the  sides  of  the  stable, 
and  around  the  gable,  as  shown  in  the  illustration. 

When  the  carpenter  work  has  been  finished, 

Paint  the  Inside  of  the  stable  white,  and  the  outside 
the  same  colors  as  used  for  the  doll-house  (see  description 
in  Chapter  XIII). 

If  you  Prefer  a  Garage,  use  your  ingenuity  to  fit  up  the 
interior  of  the  building  as  you  think  it  ought  to  be. 


CHAPTER   XVI 
A   HOME-MADE   DOLL   APARTMENT  BUILDING 

The  doll  apartment  building  in  this  chapter  is  a  new 
idea  in  doll-houses.  By  the  illustrations  you  will  see  that 
the  apartment  building  is  three  stories  high,  and  consists 
of  three  units  —  each  one  story  high  —  and  a  roof.  Dur- 
ing playtime  the  units  are  arranged  side  by  side  upon  the 
floor  so  as  to  form  a  six-room  apartment  (Fig.  244) ;  and 
afterward  they  are  piled  up  one  upon  another  as  shown 
in  Fig.  243,  and  the  roof  placed  on  top,  in  a  compact  form 
that  takes  up  but  little  floor  space. 

Building  Material.  The  apartment  building  is  built  out 
of  grocery  boxes.  The  boxes  used  for  the  units  must  be 
of  equal  size,  and  the  thing  to  do  is  to  select  those  in 
which  a  standard  brand  of  goods  come  packed.  If  one 
grocery  store  doesn't  have  what  you  want,  go  to  another. 
If  the  sides  and  ends  of  the  boxes  are  in  one  piece,  it  will 
greatly  simplify  the  matter  of  cutting  the  door  and  window 
openings. 

The  Room  Dimensions.  The  boxes  used  in  the  model 
illustrated  were  28  inches  long,  13  inches  wide,  and  8 
inches  deep.  These  provided  space  for  a  vestibule  3 
inches  by  8  inches,  a  reception-hall  8|  inches  by  8  inches, 

165 


1 66 


HOME-MADE   TOYS   FOR   GIRLS   AND   BOYS 


a  living-room  12  inches  by  18J  inches,  a  dining-room  12 
inches  by  15  inches,  a  kitchen  12  inches  by  8  inches,  a 
pantry  7  inches  by  3  inches,  two  bedrooms  —  one  12  inches 
square  and  the  other  12  inches  by  8  inches,  and  a  bath- 
room 7!  inches  by  6  inches  (Fig.  245).  You  may  have  to 
vary  the  sizes  of  your  rooms  a  trifle,  if  you  get  boxes  of 


Bedroom 
Satm-I 

ROOM 


T 


5EDROOM 


RECEPTION       LIVING-BOOM 
MALL  £ 


|vestibule| 


1 

I    KlTOIEM 

■pantry! 


DINING 
ROOM 


Fig.  245.  —  Plan  of  the  Six-Room  Doll  Apartment. 

different  proportions,  but  it  is  probable  that  you  can  keep 
to  the  same  plan  arrangement. 

The  First  Story  Unit  is  shown  in  Fig.  246,  and  diagrams 
of  its  two  partitions  A  and  B,  are  placed  to  the  right  of 
it ;   Fig.  247  shows 

The  Second  Story  Unit,  with  diagrams  of  its  three  par- 
titions C,  D,  and  £,  placed  to  the  left  and  right  of  it,  and 
Fig.  248  shows 

The  Third  Story  Unit,  with  diagrams  of  its  two  parti- 
tions F  and  G  placed  to  the  left  of  it. 


p~l   N 


-> 


d 


Fig.   244.  —  How   the   Thuke 
Stories  are  Arranged  Side 
by    Side    to    form    a    Six- 
Room  Apartment. 


~~- ■ 

IE3  E 

1 

[El  E 

E   3' 

*D  E 

El,1 

Fig.  243. -The  Most  Stylish 
Apartments  in  Doll  Town. 


A  HOME-MADE  DOLL  APARTMENT  BUILDING        167 


Mark  the  Door  and  Window  Openings  carefully  upon 
the  sides  of  the  box,  making  them  as  nearly  as  possible  in 


A 


F 


Fig.  246.  — The  First  Story  Unit  and  Diagram  of  Partitions. 
Fig.  247.  — The  Second  Story  Unit  and  Diagram  of  Partitions. 
Fig.  248.  —The  Third  Story  Unit  and  Diagram  of  Partitions. 

the  same  proportion  to  the  wall  space  as  is  shown  in  the 
illustrations.  Then,  in  cutting  the  openings,  bore  a  num- 
ber of  small  holes  a  trifle  inside  of  the  lines,  to  make  an 


i68 


HOME-MADE   TOYS   FOR   GIRLS   AND   BOYS 


opening   large   enough   to    insert    a   small   keyhole-saw  or 
bracket-saw,  and  the  cutting  will  be  easy  to  do. 

The  Bay  Windows  on  the  second  and  third  stories  are 
built  of  cigar-box  wood.  Instead  of  cutting  away  the 
entire  width  of  the  box  at  the  points  of  attaching  these 
bays,  it  is  a  better  plan  to  leave  a  narrow  strip  over  the 
opening,  as  shown  in  Fig.  249.     This  will  hold  the  walls 

together,  and  will  form  a 
"  beam  "  across  the  ceil- 
ing. The  side  edges  of  the 
pieces  that  form  the  front 
of  the  bay  must  be  slanted 
off  so  as  to  fit  at  the  proper 
angles,  and  the  window 
openings  must  be  cut  care- 
the  Openi  j  for  fully>  because    the    margin 

the  Bay  Windows,  leave  a  Narrow  Strip    of     wood     around     them     is 
over    the    Opening,    as    above,   for    a  -,       .„        ,.,  M 

"Beam  "  narrow  and  will  split  easily. 

Fasten  together  the  mem- 
bers of  the  bays,  also  the  inside  partitions,  with  glue 
and  brads. 

The  Joints  between  the  Units,  when  piled  one  upon 
another,  are  concealed  by  a  band  of  wood  \  inch  wide 
nailed  around  the  front  and  two  ends  of  the  bottom  of 
the  second  and  third  story  units  (Figs.  247  and  248). 
These  bands  should  project  about  \  inch  below  the  bottoms 
of  these  boxes,  so  as  to  set  down  over  the  boxes  beneath. 
They  must  not  extend  around  the  back  of  the  boxes,  and 


A   HOME-MADE   DOLL  APARTMENT  BUILDING        169 

cannot  be  fastened  to  the  first  story  box,  because  they 
would  interfere  with  placing  the  boxes  close  together  as 
in  Fig.  244. 

The  first  story  unit  must  be  raised  to  the  same  floor 
level  as  the  other  stories,  however,  and  a  thin  board  of 
the  same  thickness  as  the  projection  of  the  strips  on  the 

Fig.  251 


Figs.  250  and  251.  — How  the  Removable  Roof  is  Constructed. 
Fig.  252.  — How  the  Chimney  and  Chimney  Cap  are  Made. 

second  and  third  story  units  must  be  nailed  to  its  bottom 
to  bring  it  to  the  same  level  (Fig.  246). 

The  Roof  Construction  is  shown  in  Fig.  250.  Boards 
H  (Figs.  250  and  251)  should  be  cut  of  the  right  size  to 
form  a  projection  of  if  inches  over  the  front  and  ends  of 
the  building,  and  the  piece  /  should  be  cut  to  the  proper 
shape  and  size  to  form  an  equal  projection  over  the  bay 
windows.  Strips  /  and  K  are  1  inch  wide,  and  should 
be  fastened  to  boards  H  so  they  will  come  exactly  over  the 


170  HOME-MADE   TOYS   FOR   GIRLS   AND   BOYS 

front  and  end  walls  when  the  roof  is  set  in  place.  Block 
L  should  be  cut  of  such  a  shape  and  size  that  when  nailed 
to  strip  K  its  front  edges  will  come  directly  over  the  walls 
of  the  bay  windows.  A  narrow  strip  nailed  to  the  under 
side  of  the  roof  boards,  close  against  the  walls,  will  con- 
ceal the  joint  between  the  roof  and  top  story  and  make  a 
good  finish  molding. 

The  Chimney  is  made  of  two  blocks  (M  and  N,  Fig. 
252).  Notch  the  lower  block  to  fit  over  strip  /,  and  cut 
the  cap  block  large  enough  to  project  J  inch  all  around. 

The  Windows.  Old  photograph  plates  can  be  cut  down 
to  the  proper  sizes  for  the  window  openings,  but  it  will  not 
cost  much  to  have  the  paint-shop  man  cut  them  out  of 
new  material,  if  you  haven't  any.  The  glass  should  be 
just  a  trifle  smaller  than  the  openings.  Fasten  it  in  place 
with  narrow  strips  of  cigar-box  wood.  Window  sashes 
can  be  indicated  by  striping  the  glass  with  black  paint. 

Make  the  Front  Door  out  of  a  piece  of  cigar-box  wood, 
and  set  a  piece  of  glass  in  an  opening  cut  about  the  size 
shown  in  Fig.  243.  This  door  may  be  hinged  to  open, 
but  it  is  better  to  fasten  it  in  the  opening,  because  small 
pieces  are  easily  broken  off  their  hinges.  Fasten  a  small 
block  below  the  front  door  for  a  step  (Fig.  243). 

The  Inside  Doorways,  in  the  ends  of  the  first  story 
unit  and  in  the  back  of  the  second  and  third  story  units, 
may  be  fitted  with  pieces  of  board  that  can  be  set  in  when 
the  units  are  piled  up  in  the  form  of  the  building,  but  it 
is  not  necessary  to  make  this  provision. 


A  HOME-MADE   DOLL  APARTMENT  BUILDING        171 

The  Interior  Trim.  The  door  and  window  casings, 
picture  moldings,  baseboards,  and  other  trimming  should 
be  made  out  of  strips  of  cigar-box  wood.  Tack  the  strips 
in  place  with  short  brads. 

A  Fireplace  must  be  provided  for  the  living-room,  and 
one  easily  constructed  out  of  four  pieces  of  wood  is  shown 
in  Figs.  253  and  254.     Cut  blocks  O  and  P  of  the  same 


Fig.  253. — The  Living-Room  Mantel. 


Fig.  254.  —  Details  of  Mantel. 


thickness,  and  make  the  shelf  piece  Q  of  the  proper  size 
to  project  an  equal  distance  over  the  front  and  ends. 
Fasten  the  pieces  together,  then  glue  red  paper  to  the  wood, 
and  when  this  has  dried  mark  off  brick  courses  with  a 
pencil.  The  joints  may  be  accentuated  by  striping  with 
white  or  black  paint. 

Lighting  Fixtures,  simple  to  make,  are  shown  in  two 
splendid  forms  in  Figures  255  and  257.  Small  brass 
screw-hooks  such  as  are  shown  in  Figure  256  can  be  pur- 


172 


HOME-MADE  TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


m    f 


O  (l 


BRASS  HOOK 


^PENCIL-END- 

Fig.  255 


chased  at  any  hardware  store,  and  a  couple  of  dozen  of 
these,  a  lead  pencil,  and  a  number  of  large  beads,  will 
furnish  you  with  enough  material  for  making  fixtures  for 
every  room  in  the  apartment. 

You  will  see  by  Fig.  256  that  the  lighting  fixture  shown 
in  Fig.  255  consists  of  a  screw-hook  with  its  hooked  end  stuck 

through  one  of  the 
little  brass  plates  re- 
moved from  another 
screw-hook,  and  then 
pushed  into  the  hole 
in  the  end  of  a  short 
piece  of  lead-pencil. 
Cut  the  pencil  end 
about  \  inch  long, 
push  out  the  piece 
of  lead,  and  if  neces- 
sary enlarge  the  hole 
to  accommodate  the 
If  the 
piece  of  pencil  comes 
apart  where  glued,  re-glue  it.  Glue  the  little  brass  cap  to 
the  top.  Paint  the  pencil  end  white,  to  represent  glass, 
and  indicate  metal  division  strips,  or  leading,  with  black 
paint  or  ink. 

The  lighting  fixture  shown  in  Fig.  257  is  made  in  the 
same  way  as  the  other  one,  except  that  a  bead  instead  of 
the  pencil  end  is  used  for  a  globe  (Fig.  258). 


BRASSHOOK 


DEAD 


Fig.  25; 


Fig.  258 


Figs.  255-258.  —  Two  Lighting  Fixtures  and  how  ^       ^  ^ 

to  Make  Them. 


A   HOME-MADE   DOLL  APARTMENT   BUILDING        173 

The  fixture  in  Fig.  255  is  better  suited  to  the  living- 
room  and  dining-room,  and  for  fastening  each  side  of  the 
front  door;  the  fixture  in  Fig.  257  is  better  for  the  other 
rooms. 

Decorating.  Suggestions  for  decorating  a  doll-house  are 
given  in  Chapter  XIV,  but  here  are  some  additional  ideas 
to  suit  the  conditions  of  the  apartment.  It  is  the  modern 
practice  to  tint  walls  of  apartments,  and  the  best  plan  is 
to  cover  the  walls  of  each  room  with  plain  paper,  using  a 
paper  of  a  different  color  for  each  room. 

The  dining-room  should  have  a  plate-rail  on  which  to 
stand  plates  (pictures  of  plates  cut  from  advertisements 
and  pasted  upon  cardboard),  and  the  walls  below  the 
plate-rail  should  be  paneled  with  strips  of  cigar-box  wood 
for  division  strips  (Fig.  244). 

The  Outside  Walls  of  the  apartment  building  are  sup- 
posedly brick  ;  therefore  paint  them  a  good  red,  brown,  or 
yellow  brick  color,  and  paint  the  roof  cornice,  and  the 
horizontal  bands  between  stories,  white,  as  a  contrast. 


CHAPTER   XVII 
HOME-MADE   DOLL   FURNITURE 

The  metal  furniture  which  you  can  buy  is  very  pretty 
when  it  is  new,  but  this  new  appearance  does  not  last 
long  after  it  has  come  into  a  youngster's  possession,  for 
the  pieces  are  very  slender  and  delicate,  and  thus  easily 
broken. 

Wooden  furniture  is  the  most  durable  kind,  and  plain 
and  simple  pieces  will  generally  outlast  the  fancy  ones. 
The  designs  illustrated  in  this  chapter  make  very  substan- 
tial pieces,  as  there  are  no  spindle  legs  or  fancy  arms  to 
break  off.  They  follow  the  lines  of  the  mission  furniture, 
that  simple  style  used  in  the  early  American  mission 
schools,  and  which  is  to-day  being  extensively  made  in 
handsome  pieces  for  the  furnishings  of  modern  homes. 
You  will  find  the 

Miniature  Mission  Furniture,  illustrated  and  described 
in  this  chapter,  simple  to  make  and  something  which  is 
easy  to  sell,  for  there  is  nothing  like  it  at  present  upon 
the  market. 

Cigar-boxes  furnish  the  nicest  material  for  making  this 
furniture,  and  the  various  parts  can  be  cut  to  the  right 
shape  and  size  with 

174 


HOME-MADE   DOLL   FURNITURE  175 

A  Scroll-Saw.  Procure  small  brads  and  glue  with 
which  to  fasten  the  pieces  together. 

To  Prepare  the  Cigar-Boxes  for  use,  place  them  in  a  tub 
of  boiling  water  and  let  them  remain  there  until  the  paper 
labels  readily  pull  off.  Do  not  use  a  knife  in  removing 
the  paper,  as  it  is  likely  to  roughen  the  wood.  The  paper 
will  come  off  by  allowing  it  to  soak  long  enough.  When 
the  boxes  are  clean,  set  them  in  the  sun  to  dry,  after  bind- 
ing the  covers  to  the  backs  to  prevent  them  from  warp- 
ing. Pull  the  boxes  apart  when  they  are  thoroughly  dry, 
and  throw  out  such  pieces  as  have  printing  upon  them,  for 
these  would  spoil  the  appearance  of  the  furniture  if  used. 

In  order  to  simplify  the  matter  of  cutting  the  parts 
that  make  the  furniture,  the  curved  pieces  have  been 
drawn  out  carefully  on  page  177,  so  that  they  can  be  laid 
off  upon  the  strips  of  cigar-boxes  without  any  trouble,  by 
the  process  of 

Enlarging  by  Squares.  These  drawings  are  shown 
one-quarter  of  their  full  size  (half  their  width  and  half 
their  height).  To  enlarge  them  procure  a  piece  of  card- 
board nine  by  thirteen  inches,  or  a  little  larger  than  twice 
the  size  of  the  drawing  each  way,  and  divide  it  into  squares 
just  twice  the  size  of  those  on  page  177.  That  will  make 
sixteen  squares  in  the  width  of  the  cardboard  and  twenty- 
four  in  the  length,  each  half  an  inch  square.  In  order  to 
get  the  squares  spaced  equally,  it  is  best  to  lay  off  the 
points  first  with  a  ruler  along  the  top,  bottom,  and  two 
sides  of  the  sheet  of  cardboard,  and  then  connect    the 


176  HOME-MADE   TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 

points  with  the  ruler  and  a  sharp  lead-pencil.  Then 
number  the  squares  as  in  the  illustration,  using  the  figures 
along  the  sides  and  letters  across  the  top  and  bottom  of  the 
sheet. 

With  the  sheet  of  cardboard  thus  prepared  it  is  a  simple 
matter  to 

Reproduce  the  Drawings  of  Figs.  259  to  266  by  locating 
the  points  of  the  curves  and  corners  of  the  pieces,  as 
shown  in  the  illustrations,  in  corresponding  positions  in 
the  squares  on  your  cardboard  sheet.  The  curves  may  be 
drawn  in  by  eye,  after  locating  them  with  reference  to 
their  surrounding  squares,  but  the  surest  way  of  enlarg- 
ing them  accurately  is  by  laying  off  the  points  where  the 
curve  strikes  each  horizontal  and  vertical  line  in  the  illus- 
tration, upon  the  enlarged  drawing.  These  points  can 
then  be  connected  with  a  curved  line. 

Make  all  of  the  lines  heavy  so  they  can  be  distinguished 
from  your  guide  lines,  and  after  carefully  going  over  the 
drawing,  comparing  it  with  that  on  page  177  to  see  that 
no  mistake  has  been  made  in  locating  the  points  in  enlarg- 
ing, cut  the  various  pieces  apart.     These  will  give  you 

The  Patterns  with  which  to  mark  out  the  pieces  on  the 
wood. 

We  will  first  note  the  construction  of 

The  Chairs  shown  in  Figs.  267  and  268.  These  are 
four  and  one-half  inches  high,  two  inches  wide,  and  an 
inch  and  one-half  deep.  Cut  the  back  for  the  chair  in 
Fig.  267  four  and  three-eighths  inches  high  and  an  inch 


K     L      M     M     O      P      Q. 


EFGHI       J       KL-MNO 

Figs.  259-266. — Patterns  for  Furniture. 
177 


P     Q~ 


i78 


HOME-MADE   TOYS   FOR   GIRLS   AND   BOYS 


and  three-quarters  wide,  the  sides  by  the  pattern  in  Fig. 
259  and  the  seat  an  inch  and  one-quarter  by  an  inch  and 
three-quarters.  With  the  pieces  cut  out,  fasten  them 
together  with  brads  and  glue,  placing  the  seat  between 


Fig.  267. 


Chairs 


Fig.  268. 


the  arms  and  back  so  that  it  is  an  inch  and  one-half  above 
the  base. 

Cut  the  back  for  the  other  chair  (Fig.  268)  four  and 
one-half  inches  high  by  two  inches  wide,  the  seat  an  inch 
and  a  quarter  by  an  inch  and  three-quarters,  and  the  sides 
an  inch  and  three-eighths  wide  by  two  and  one-half  high. 
To  get  the  curve  in  the  bottom  edge  of  the  side  pieces,  use 
the  pattern  in  Fig.  259. 

The  Settee  (Fig.  269)  should  have  its  sides  cut  by  the 
pattern  of  Fig.  260.     Make  the  back  piece  three  and  three- 


HOME-MADE   DOLL  FURNITURE 


179 


quarters  inches  wide  and 
three  and  one-quarter 
inches  high,  and  the  seat 
three  and  three-quarters 
inches  by  an  inch  and 
one-half.  Fasten  the  seat 
against  the  back  an  inch 
and  one-half  above  the 
base. 

Tables  for  the  living- 
room,  dining-room,  bed- 
room, ball-room,  and  nurs- 
ery of  a  doll-house  may 
be  patterned  after  the  de- 
signs of  Figs.  270  and  271. 
These  should  be  two  and  one 


Fig.  270.— A  Table. 


Fig.  269. — A  Settee. 

half  inches  high  to  be  of  proper 
proportion  for  the  chairs. 

The  pieces  necessary  to 
make  Fig.  270  are  a  top 
two  inches  square,  two  sides 
an  inch  and  one-half  wide 
by  two  and  one-half  inches 
high,  and  a  shelf  an  inch 
and  one-quarter  square. 
Fasten  the  pieces  together  as 
,  in  the  illustration,  placing  the 
shelf  between  the  side  pieces 
an  inch  from  the  bottom. 


i8o 


HOME-MADE   TOYS   FOR   GIRLS   AND   BOYS 


The  other  design  (Fig.  271)  will  do  nicely  for 
A  Dining-Room  Table,  or  table  for  the  center  of  the 
living-room.  The  top  of  this  should  be  five  inches  long 
and  three  inches  wide.  Cut  the  side  pieces  by  the  pattern 
in  Fig.  261  and,  after  fastening  them  to  the  under  side  of 
the  table-top  four  inches  apart,  brace  them  with  a  strip 

three  and  three-quarters 
inches  long  by  half  an 
inch  wide,  as  shown  in 
Fig.  271. 

A  Side-Board  similar 
to  Fig.  272  should  be 
made  for  the  dining- 
room.  The  pattern  for 
the  side  pieces  is  shown 
in  Fig.  262.  After  saw- 
ing these  out,  cut  a  piece 
seven  inches  long  by  three  inches  wide  for  the  back  and 
fasten  the  side  pieces  to  the  edges  of  it.  The  location 
of  the  shelves  can  be  obtained  best  by  referring  to  Fig. 
272  and  the  pattern  in  Fig.  262.  Cut  the  bottom  shelf 
(A  in  Fig.  272)  three  inches  long  by  an  inch  and  one- 
quarter  wide  and  fasten  it  to  the  side  pieces  half  an  inch 
above  the  base  (line  24  on  pattern,  Fig.  262).  Make  shelf 
B  three  by  one  inches  and  place  it  at  line  22.  C  should  be 
three  and  three-quarters  inches  long  by  an  inch  and  one- 
half  wide,  with  a  small  notch  cut  near  each  end  with  your 
knife,  to  make  it  fit  over  the  side  pieces  (see  illustration). 


Fig.  271.  —  Another  Design. 


HOME-MADE  DOLL   FURNITURE 


181 


Cut  shelf  D  three  inches  long  by  half  an  inch  wide,  fasten- 
ing it  in  place  at  line  No.  17,  E  three  inches  long  by  seven- 
sixteenths  of  an  inch  wide,  fastening  it  at  line  No.  15,  and 
F  three  inches  long  by  three- 
eighths  of  an  inch  wide,  fasten- 
ing it  at  line  No.  13.  The  top 
shelf  (G)  is  three  and  three- 
quarters  inches  long  and  half 
an  inch  wide  and  is  fastened 
to  the  tops  of  the  side  pieces 
as  shown  in  the  drawing. 

The  lower  portion  of  the 
side-board  is  inclosed  with  two 
doors  two  inches  high  by  an  inch 
and  one-half  wide.  Small  pieces 
of  cloth  may  be  used  for  hinges, 
but  it  is  better  to  use  pins,  run- 
ning them  through  the  shelf 
above  and  below  (A  and  C, 
Fig.  272)  into  the  doors.  Stick 
the  pins  near  the  edge  of  the 
doors  and  see  that  they  are 
straight,  so  the  doors  will  open 
easily.  A  small  mirror  attached 
to  the  back  between  shelves  C  and  D  will  complete  this 
piece  of  furniture. 

A  Mirror  in  a  frame  should  be  made  for  the  living- 
room  of  the  doll-house.     A  neat  and  suitable  design  for 


Fig.  272. — A  Side-Board. 


182 


HOME-MADE  TOYS  FOR   GIRLS    AND   BOYS 


one  of  these  will  be  seen  in  Fig.  273.  For  its  construc- 
tion cut  two  sides  by  means  of  the  pattern  in  Fig.  263,  a 
piece  five  inches  long  by  three  inches  wide  for  the  back, 
and  a  strip  three  inches  long  by  three-eighths  of  an  inch 
wide  for  a  shelf.  Fasten  the  sides  to  the  edges  of  the 
back  piece,  and  the  shelf  between  the  sides  about  three- 
quarters  of  an  inch  above  the  base.  Now  procure  a  mirror 
such  as  you  can  buy  in  a  toy-shop  for 
five  or  ten  cents  (or  a  piece  of  a 
broken  mirror  cut  down  to  the  right 
size  will  do  very  nicely),  and  attach  it 
to  the  center  of  the  back. 

The  Grandfather's  Clock  (Fig.  274) 
makes  an  effective  piece  of  furniture 
for  the  hall  or  living-room,  and  is 
easily  made.  Figure  264  shows  the 
pattern  for  the  front  of  this  clock. 
The  back  is  made  the  same,  with  the 
omission  of  the  square  opening  cut  in 
the  front  frame  for  the  clock-face.     Cut 

Fig.  273. -A  Mirror.        a  block  of  WQod  twQ  by  twQ  by  three_ 

quarters  inches  to  fit  between  the  frames  at  the  top. 
After  nailing  the  pieces  together,  procure  a  face  from  a 
toy  watch,  and  fasten  it  in  the  opening  made  for  it  in  the 
front  frame.  A  button  suspended  by  means  of  a  piece 
of  thread  from  a  tack  placed  in  the  bottom  of  the  block 
forms  the  pendulum. 

It  will  be  unnecessary  to  give  any  suggestions  for 


HOME-MADE  DOLL   FURNITURE 


183 


Kitchen  Furniture,  such  as  chairs  and  tables,  for  these 
can  also  be  made  out  of  cigar-box 
wood  similar  to  the  designs  illus- 
trated in  this  chapter,  with  per- 
haps a  few  modifications  which 
will  make  them  simpler. 

Now  for  the  making  of  some 
pieces  of  bedroom  furniture. 
You  will  find  in  Figs.  275  and 
276  two  designs  that  are  easily 
carried  out,  one  or  both  of  which 
may  be  used  for 

The  Beds  of  a  doll-house.  To 
make  Fig.  275,  cut  the  head  and 
foot  by  means  of  the  pattern  in 
Fig.  265,  and  cut  the  two  sides 
by  means  of  the  pattern  in  Fig. 
266.  After  preparing  these  pieces 
and  fastening  them  together  as 
shown  in  the  illustration  (Fig. 
275),  cut  a  few  strips  a  quarter 
of  an  inch  wide  for  slats  and 
fasten  them  between  the  sides  of 
the  bed.  It  is  advisable  to  fasten 
these  in  place  to  prevent  them 
from  being  lost. 

The  side  pieces  for  the  other 
bed  (Fig.  276)  are  cut  out  with  the  same  pattern  (Fig.  266) 


Fig.  274. 
A  Grandfather's  Clock. 


1 84 


HOME-MADE  TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


Make  the  head  and  foot  pieces  three  by  four  and  one-half 
inches,  cutting  a  piece  two  by  an  inch  and  one-quarter  out 


Fig.  275.  —  A  Bed. 


of  the  top  of  each  as  shown  in  the  drawing  (Fig.  276),  and 
using  the  pattern  of  the  other  bed  for  cutting  the  curve  in 


Fig.  276. — Another  Design. 


HOME-MADE   DOLL  FURNITURE 


i85 


the  bottom  edge.  Nail  the  pieces  together  in  their  proper 
places,  after  which  cut  some  slats  and  fasten  them  in  the 
bottom. 

The  Dresser  (Fig.  277)  is  made  somewhat  similar  to 
the  side-board.  Cut  the  sides  by 
the  same  pattern  (Fig.  262)  and 
fasten  them  to  the  edges  of  the 
back  piece,  which  should  be  six 
and  one-half  inches  high  by  three 
inches  wide.  Cut  shelf  A  three 
by  one  and  one-quarter  inches, 
B  and  C  three  by  one  and  one- 
eighth,  D  three  by  one  and  three- 
sixteenths,  and  E  and  F  one-half 
by  one  and  one-quarter  inches. 
Fasten  shelf  A  between  the  sides 
at  line  No.  24  (see  Fig.  262),  B 
at  line  No.  23,  C  at  line  No.  22, 
D  at  line  No.  21,  and  notch  the 
ends  of  E  and  F  to  fit  over  the 
side  pieces  at  line  No.  20. 

Drawers  to  fit  the  lower  shelves 
of  the  dresser  may  be  made  out 
of  small  strips  of  cigar-boxes  or 
pieces  of  cardboard,  glued  to- 
gether. A  small  mirror  fastened  in  the  position  shown  in 
the  drawing  will  complete  the  work  upon  this  piece  of 
furniture. 


Fig.  277. — A  Dresser. 


1 86 


HOME-MADE  TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


A  Wash-Stand  can  be  made  for  the  bathroom  and  each  of 
the  bedrooms  similar  to  Fig.  278.  The  sides  for  this  should 
be  five  inches  high  by  an  inch  and  one-quarter  wide,  and 
the  shelves  one  by  three  inches.  Fasten  the  lower  shelf 
three-quarters  of  an  inch  above  the  base,  and  the  top  shelf 
at  a  height  of  two  and  one-half  inches.  When  the  stand 
has  been  put  together,  fit  a  round 
stick,  about  an  eighth  of  an  inch  in 
diameter,  in  holes  made  in  the  sides 
with  a  gimlet  (see  illustration).  This 
forms  the  towel-rack.  Hang  a  small 
drapery  over  the  lower  portion  of  the 
stand. 

Finishing.  When  the  pieces  of 
furniture  have  been  completed,  they 
should  be  rubbed  down  with  emery- 
paper  to  remove  the  rough  edges, 
and  also  any  rough  places  that  may 
have  been  caused  by  soaking  the 
boxes  in  water.  Then  give  the 
wood  several  coats  of  linseed-oil.  This  makes  a  beautiful 
finish  for  this  kind  of  wood,  which  may  be  improved  by 
adding  a  coat  of  wax.  The  little  hearts  may  be  painted 
upon  the  pieces  as  shown  in  the  illustration,  with  a  small 
brush  and  red  paint,  or  may  be  cut  out  of  red  paper  and 
glued  to  the  wood. 

If  desired,  the  bedroom  furniture  may  be  painted  with 
white  enamel. 


Fig.  278.  — A  Wash-Stand. 


HOME-MADE  DOLL  FURNITURE 


187 


Other   Cigar-Box   Furniture 

In  Figs.  279  and  282  will  be  found  some  pieces  of  furni- 
ture that  are  simpler  to  make  than  those  just  described, 
and  although  they  may  not  be  so  pretty,  they  present 
a  very  good  appearance 
when  neatly  made. 

The  author  constructed 
many  pieces  of  this  fur- 
niture when  a  boy,  and 
found  them  suitable  as 
presents,  and  something 
that  was  always  easy  to 
sell. 

The  cost  of  making  a  set 
amounts  to  but  a  few  cents, 
cigar-boxes  being  the  prin- 
cipal material.  They  are 
also  very  quickly  made, 
as  the  boxes  require  but 
little  cutting. 

For  the  construction  of 

A  Folding-Bed,  such  as 
is  shown  in  Figs.  279  and  280,  select  two  cigar-boxes,  one  of 
which  will  fit  inside  the  other.  The  smaller  box  should  be 
a  little  shorter  than  the  inside  opening  of  the  larger  box. 
After  removing  the  paper  from  each,  place  the  smaller  box 
inside  the  larger  one,  as  shown  in  Fig.  279,  so  that  the  bot- 


Fig.  279. — A  Doll's  Folding-Bed. 


i88 


HOME-MADE   TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


torn  of  the  inner  box  is  flush  with  the  edge  of  the  outer  box. 
Then  drive  a  brad  through  both  boxes  on  each  side,  about 
three-quarters  of  an  inch  from  the  end  as  shown  at  A  (Fig. 


l'IG.  281.  — Foot. 


Fig.  280.  —  Folding-Bed  (open). 


279).  These  brads  should  run  through  the  outer  box  into 
the  bottom  of  the  inner  box,  and  should  be  driven  in  carefully 
so  as  not  to  split  the  wood.  The  inner  box  should  now  fold 
down  as  shown  in  Fig.  280,  moving  upon  the  brad  pivots. 


HOME-MADE  DOLL  FURNITURE 


189 


Purchase  a  five  or  ten  cent  mirror  and  fasten  it  to  the  front 
of  the  bed,  after  which  cut  two  wooden  feet  similar  to 
Fig.  281  and  glue  the  pegs  on  the  ends  of  these  in  gimlet 
holes  made  above  the  mirror.  Finish  the  wood  the  same  as 
described  for  the  other  cigar-box  furniture. 

The  Dresser  shown  in  Fig.  282  is  made  out  of  a  box  the 
same  size    as   the  larger  one    used    for    the    folding-bed. 


2.  — Dresser  Completed. 


Fig.  283.  — A  Doll's  Dresser. 


Saw  the  sides  of  the  box  in  half,  crosswise,  and  remove 
the  upper  half  and  the  end  piece.  Then  nail  the  end  across 
the  tops  of  the  remaining  halves  of  the  sides.  When  this 
has  been  done,  divide  up  the  lower  portion  of  the  box  into 
compartments  as  shown  in  the  drawing  (Fig.  283).     This 


I  go  HOME-MADE   TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 

should  have  a  small  drapery  hung  over  it.  The  upper 
portion  of  the  dresser  should  have  a  mirror  attached  to  it, 
and  some  lace  draped  over  the  top  and  sides  will  add  greatly 
to  its  appearance. 

All  you  will  have  to  do  in  making 

A  Wardrobe  will  be  to  fasten  some  small  hooks  inside  of 
a  cigar-box,  attach  the  cover  with  a  strip  of  linen  —  the 
same  way  it  was  attached  before  you  soaked  it  off  —  and 
hang  a  mirror  on  the  front. 

These  pieces  of  furniture  were  designed  for  separate 
sets,  and  would  not  do  for  doll-houses  the  size  of  those  in 
the  preceding  chapters,  unless  the  boxes  were  cut  down  to 
smaller  proportions. 


CHAPTER  XVIII 
HOME-MADE   CIGAR-BOX  TOYS 

Cigar-boxes  are  splendid  material  for  a  variety  of  home- 
made toys.  In  this  chapter  are  shown  some  easily  con- 
structed wagons,  a  Jack-in-the-box,  a  cradle,  and  several 
tables  and  chairs  of  a  different  pattern  from  the  doll 
furniture  for  which  working  drawings  were  given  in  the 
preceding  chapter. 

Get  an  assortment  of  shapes  and  sizes  of  boxes  at  a 
cigar  store,  and  prepare  them  for  use  as  directed  on  page 
175.  Use  f  inch  and  J  inch  brads,  and  glue,  for  fastening 
the  pieces  together. 

A  scroll-saw,  bracket-saw,  coping-saw,  or  a  very  sharp 
jack-knife  should  be  used  where 

Cutting  is  necessary.  Do  not  attempt  to  split  the 
wood,  as  the  grain  is  seldom  straight,  but  lay  it  down  upon 
a  board  and  score  it  with  a  knife  in  the  way  in  which  you 
would  score  a  piece  of  cardboard ;  then  break  it  along  the 
scored  line,  or  continue  cutting  until  the  piece  is  cut  in 
two.  If  you  use  a  saw,  cut  a  little  away  from  the  outlines 
of  the  work  and  then  trim  up  with  a  knife  and  sandpaper. 

The  wagons,  Jack-in-the-box,  and  doll  furniture  shown 
in  this  chapter  were  designed  with  the  idea  of  saving  as 

191 


'>2ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ&ZZ2%ZZZZZ%Z%ZZE. 


front  axle     I      Rear  Axle 


192  HOME-MADE  TOYS  FOR   GIRLS   AND   BOYS 

much  cutting  as  possible,  and  you  will  see  by  the  illus- 
trations that  in  many  cases  the  boxes  are  not  altered. 

The  Express-Wagon  shown  in  Fig.  284  is  made  out  of 
a  long  flat  box.  Cut  down  the  sides  at  the  front  and  con- 
struct a  seat  on  top  of  the  sides  as  shown  in  Fig.  286. 
Cut  the  front  wheels  about  i\  inches  in  diameter  and  the 
rear  wheels  about  2!  inches  in  diameter.  If  you  haven't  a 
compass  with  which  to  describe  the  circles,  you  can  mark 

out    the    wheels   with    cups   or 
\T~  seat  ~"77   glass    tumblers.       Cut    the 

wooden  axles  as  shown  in  Fig. 

286,  making  the  front  axle  — 

for  the  smaller  wheels  —  deeper 

than  the  rear  one,  then  fasten 

them  to  the  wagon  and  nail  the 

wheels  to  their  ends.     Drive  a 

tack    into    the    front    of    the 

wagon-box  and  tie  a  cord  to  it, 

or,  if  you  have  a  small  toy  horse  to  hitch  to  the  wagon, 

fasten  a  pair  of  shafts  to  the  under  side  of  the  box  as  is 

shown  upon  the  two-wheel  cart. 

The  Cart  in  Fig.  285  is  made  out  of  a  square  flat  box 
with  its  wheels  fastened  to  the  center  of  the  under  side. 
Make  the  wheels  about  2§  inches  in  diameter. 

The  Auto  Delivery -Wagon  (Figs.  287  and  288.  See  Front- 
ispiece) requires  two  boxes  8^  inches  long,  5  inches  wide,  and 
2\  inches  deep.  You  will  see  by  the  illustrations  that  one 
box  is  inverted  upon  the  other.     Before  fastening  them 


CENTeR-UNE-*] 

Fig.    286.  —  Cross-Section    of    the 


Fig.  285. 


Fig.  284.     An  Express-Wagon. 
Fig.  285.     A  Cart. 


HOME-MADE   CIGAR-BOX  TOYS  193 

together,  remove  the  two  ends  of  the  upper  box  and  the 
rear  end  of  the  lower  box  (leaving  the  front  end  for  the 
dashboard),  and  cut  2  inches  off  the  sides  at  the  front  and  an 
additional  piece  1  inch  by  if  inches  from  the  sides  of  the 
upper  box  for  windows.  Fasten  the  boxes  together  by 
nailing  strips  to  the  ends  of  side  pieces.  Nail  a  narrow  strip 
across  the  top  of  the  rear  end  of  the  wagon  and  hinge  a 
drop  end-gate  to  the  wagon-bed  with  cloth  strips.  Sup- 
port the  end-gate  with  a  cloth  strap.  Tack  a  curtain  of 
black  cloth  to  the  top  cross  strip  and  sew  two  cloth  straps 
to  the  curtain,  so  that  it  may  be  fastened  up  in  a  roll,  as 
shown  in  the  photograph.  Make  the  wheels  and  axles  like 
those  of  the  express  wagon,  but  cut  the  front  and  rear 
wheels,  also  the  two  axles,  of  equal  size.  Cut  out  a  small 
steering-wheel  and  fasten  it  on  a  short  wooden  rod  inside  of 
the  dashboard.  Make  a  seat  and  seat  back,  nail  the  back 
to  the  seat,  and  then  fasten  the  seat  between  the  sides 
of  the  wagon  just  below  the  windows. 

A  Jack-in-the-box  (Fig.  289)  is  a  simpler  toy  to  make 
than  you  might  imagine.  The  box  should  measure  about 
5!  inches  by  5!  inches  by  5  inches.  Hinge  the  cover  to 
the  top  with  two  pieces  of  heavy  cloth ;  glue  one  piece  to 
the  inside  of  the  cover  and  box,  and  the  other  to  the  outside. 
Drive  a  small  tack  into  the  front  edge  of  the  cover,  and 
below  it  fasten  a  small  hook  on  to  the  box ;  the  hook  may 
be  bent  from  a  short  piece  of  wire. 

A  spiral  spring  from  an  old  bed-spring  will  do  for  Jack's 
body,  but  if  you  cannot  get  one  of  these  it  is   a  simple 


194 


HOME-MADE   TOYS  FOR  GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


matter  to  make  a  spring.  Take  a  piece  of  No.  12  gauge 
wire  about  10  feet  in  length  and  wind  it  around  a  rolling- 
pin  or  anything  that  is  cylindrical  and  about  2J  inches  in 
diameter.  Fasten  this  spring  with  doubled-pointed  tacks 
upon  a  piece  of  wood  cut  to  fit  the  inside  of  the  box  (Fig. 
290),  then  procure  a  small  doll's  head,  baste  a  circular  piece 
of  cardboard  to  the  top  of  the  spring  and  to  this  sew  the 
head.  Make  a  cloth  fool's  cap  to 
glue  on  Jack's  head,  covering  his 
hair  entirely,  and  also  a  loose  jacket 
to  fit  over  his  spiral  body ;  for  these 
use  any  bright-colored  cotton  cloth 
that  will  fall  into  folds  easily.  Tack 
the  base  of  the  spring  to  the  bottom 
of  the  box. 

Make  the  seat  for 
The  Round-Seated  Chair  shown  in 
Fig.  291  2  inches  in  diameter,  the 
back  5  inches  high,  2  inches  wide  at 
the  top,  and  i|  inches  wide  at  the  seat ;  cut  the  front  leg 
2§  inches  high  by  i|  inches  wide. 

The  Round  Center-Table  (Fig.  292)  should  have  a  base 
built  up  of  four  strips  as  shown  in  Fig.  296.     Cut  the  cir- 
cular top  5  inches  in  diameter.     A  saucer  may  be  used 
with  which  to  mark  this  out. 
Select  a  long  flat  box  for 

The  Dining-Table  shown  in  Fig.  293,  and  after  mak- 
ing four  built-up  legs  as  shown  in  Fig.  297  fasten    them 


Fig.  297. 

Leg  of  Din 

ing-Table. 


Fig.  296. 

Pedestal  of 

Center-Table. 


Fig.  289. 
A  Jack-in-the-Box. 


Fig.  292. 
A  Round  Center-Table. 


FlG-   290.— The  Skeleton  of         Fig.  294.— A  Square-Seated  Chair, 

THE   JACK-IN-THE-BOX. 


HOME-MADE   CIGAR-BOX  TOYS  195 

into  the  four  corners  of  the  box  table  top   with  brads 
and  glue. 

In  making  the  little 

Square-Seated  Chair  (Fig.  294),  cut  the  seat  about  2 
inches  wide  by  2\  inches  deep,  the  front  legs  2\  inches  high 
by  f  inch  wide,  and  the  back  legs  4^  inches  high  by  f  inch 
wide.  Brace  the  legs  and  back  with  crosspieces,  and  you 
will  have  a  very  firm  and  artistic  dining-room  chair. 

Select  a  box  about  9  inches  by  5  inches  by  2\  inches  in 
size  for  making 

The  Doll's  Cradle  shown  in  Fig.   295.     Cut  the  two 
rockers  by  the  pattern  in  Fig. 
298  and  fasten  them  to   the 
bottom  of  the  box  1  inch  from  \^ 
the  ends.     Use  the  rim  of  a 
breakfast  plate  in  drawing  the 

r  ,  ■.  t  ,  ■.  j  Fig.    208.  —  Pattern   for   Cradle 

arc  of  the  rockers ;  then  draw  Rockers, 

the  rounded  ends,  being  care- 
ful to  get  them  alike.     Saw  out  the  rockers  very  partic- 
ularly so  as  not  to  split  off  the  ends.     Fasten  the  pieces  to 
the  cradle  box  with  brads  driven  through  the  box  bottom 
into  their  top  edge. 

After  the  cigar-box  toys  have  been  made,  rub  down  the 
wood  with  fine  sandpaper.  Then  drive  all  nail-heads  below 
the  surface,  fill  up  the  holes  with  putty  stained  to  match 
the  wood  as  nearly  as  possible,  and  finish  with  two  coats  of 
boiled  linseed-oil.  Apply  the  oil  with  a  rag,  then  wipe  off 
all  surplus  oil  with  a  dry  cloth. 


CHAPTER  XIX 

HOME-MADE   SPOOL  AND   CARDBOARD  TOYS 

All  that  is  required  for  making  the  little  toys  shown  in 
this  chapter  are  spools,  cardboard,  paper,  a  straight-grained 
stick  out  of  which  to  cut  pegs,  some  tacks,  pins,  and  glue. 


Fig.  299.  —  Doll  Carriage. 

Did  you  ever  see  a  better  model  of 

A  Baby  Carriage  than  that  shown  in  Fig.  299,  with  its 
rounded  ends,  arched  bottom,  and  adjustable  hood  ?  It  is 
easy  to  make. 

Figure  300  shows  the  details  for  constructing  the  carriage 

196 


HOME-MADE   SPOOL  AND   CARDBOARD   TOYS 


197 


body.  Cut  four  wooden  pegs  to  fit  loosely  in  the  holes  of 
four  spools  of  equal  size,  and  make  them  of  the  right  length 
so  when  slipped  into  the  holes  their  ends  will  project  about 
J  inch  beyond  the  spool  ends.  Then  cut  the  bottom  strip 
B  5  inches  long  by  the  width  of  the  spools,  bend  it  slightly 


Fig.  302 


Fig.  301 
Figs.  300-302. 


Details  of  Doll  Carriage. 


as  shown,  to  give  a  curve  to  the  carriage  bottom,  and 
tack  the  ends  of  the  strip  to  two  of  the  spools  (A). 

The  sides  C  are  of  cardboard  and  should  be  i|  inches 
wide  at  the  widest  point,  by  the  length  of  the  carriage  body. 
Punch  holes  through  these  side  pieces  in  the  right  places 
for  the  ends  of  the  pegs  in  spools  A  to  stick  through. 

Before  fastening  the  side  pieces  to  spools  A,  you  must 
attach  the  wheels  (Figs.  301  and  302).     Cut  the  cardboard 


198 


HOME-MADE   TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


uprights  D  3^  inches  long  and  J  inch  wide ;  then  after 
cutting  holes  through  each  near  the  ends,  for  the  spool  pegs 
to  slip  through,  cut  down  the  width  between  the  holes  to 
about  J  inch  (Fig.  302).     Slip  the  lower  ends  of  uprights  D 


Fig.  304 


Fig.  3°5 
Baby  Carriage  Hood. 
Diagram  of  Hood. 
Carriage  Handles. 


over  the  pegs  in  spool  wheels  E,  then  the  upper  ends  over 
the  pegs  in  spools  A.  Glue  the  upper  ends  to  the  ends  of 
spools  A,  then  slip  the  carriage  sides  C  over  the  pegs  of 
spools  A,  and  glue  them  in  place. 

The  carriage  hood  (Fig.  303  )  is  made  of  a  piece  of  stiff 
paper  about  4J  inches  square  (Fig.  304),  slashed  in  three 


HOME-MADE   SPOOL  AND   CARDBOARD   TOYS  199 


places  along  two  opposite  edges  for  a  distance  of  about 
ij  inches,  and  then  folded  over  as  indicated  by  dotted 
lines.  Bring  together  the  ends  of  the  slashed  edges  of  the 
piece  of  paper,  as  shown  in  Fig.  303,  coat  them  with  glue, 
and  press  together  until  the  glue  has  dried.  Punch  a  hole 
through  each  side  of  the  top,  as  shown,  for  the  projecting 
ends  of  the  spool  peg 
to  slip  through. 

The  carriage 
handle  is  made  of 
two  cardboard  strips 
(F,  Fig.  305),  and  a 
match  (G).  Stick 
the  match  through 
holes  made  near  the 
ends  of  strips  F,  and 
glue  the  lower  ends 
of  the  strips  to  the 
inside  face  of  the 
sides  (Fig.  299). 
This  completes  the 
carriage. 


Fig.  307 


Fig.  306.  —The  Two-Wheel  Cart. 
Fig.  307-309.  —  Details  of  Cart. 


The  Two-Wheel  Cart  (Fig.  306)  is  made  of  a  small  box 
cover,  and  one  of  the  spools  on  which  crochet-cotton  comes. 
Prepare  a  bent  piece  of  cardboard  like  that  shown  in  Fig. 
308,  with  ends  A  turned  down  at  the  proper  points  so  there 
will  be  only  room  enough  between  them  for  the  spool  to 
turn  freely.     Punch  a  hole  through  each  turned  down  end 


200 


HOME-MADE  TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


for  a  stick  axle  to  run  through.     Then  cut  two  slots  through 
the  box  cover  the  same  distance  apart  as  ends  A  (Fig.  307), 


Fig.  31: 


Fig.  311 
Fig.  310.  —  Merry-go-round.  Fig.  311.  — Teeter. 

Fig.  312.  —  Cardboard  Strip  for  Merry-go-round  and  Teeter. 

centering  the  pair  both  crosswise  and  lengthwise  of  the 

cover,  and  stick  ends 
A  through  the  slots 
and  glue  portion  B 
to  the  cover.  Cut 
the  wheel  axle 
enough  smaller  than 
the  spool  hole  so 
the  spool  will  turn 
easily,  then  push  it 
through  the  hole  in 
the    spool    and    the 

Fig.   313.  —  Boy   and   Girl   Riders    for   Merry-go- 
round  and  Teeter,  holes    in    ends    A. 


HOME-MADE   SPOOL  AND   CARDBOARD   TOYS         201 


-  Fig-  3i5 


Glue  the  end  of  a  cardboard  strip  to  the  under  side  of  the 
cover  for  a  shaft. 

The  Toy  Merry-go-round  in  Fig.  310  consists  of  a  strip  of 
heavy  cardboard  turned  up  at  its  ends  (Fig.  312),  tacked  at 
its  center  to  the  end  of  a  stick  cut  small  enough  to  turn 
easily  in  the  hole  in  a  spool. 

The  spool  slipped  over 
the  stick  is  grasped  by  the 
right  hand,  and  the  left 
hand  starts  the  merry-go- 
round  and  keeps  it  in  mo- 
tion by  twirling  the  stick  to 
which  the  cardboard  strip 
is  fastened. 

The  boy  and  girl  riders, 
shown  in  Fig.  313  are  of  the 
right  size  so  you  can  trace 
them  off  upon  a  piece  of 
tracing-paper  and  then 
transfer  to  cardboard. 
After  cutting  them  out  of 
the  cardboard,  color  both 
sides  with  crayons  or  water-colors,  and  glue  them  to  the 
turned-up  ends  of  the  cardboard  strip. 

The  Teeter-Board  (Fig.  311)  is  made  of  the  same  kind 
of  a  strip  as  that  used  for  the  merry-go-round  (Fig.  312). 
Tack  this  strip  at  its  center  to  the  side  of  a  spool,  and  mount 
the  spool  in  a  cardboard  frame  in  the  same  way  that  the 


Fig.  314 


Fig.  314.  —Doll  Swing. 
Fig.  315.  — Detail  of  Swing. 


202 


HOME-MADE   TOYS  FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


spool  wheels  of  the  cart  are  mounted  (Figs.  308  and  309) ; 

but  make  the  peg  axle  to  fit  tight 
in  the  spool  hole.  Prepare  a  boy 
and  girl  rider  similar  to  those  made 
for  the  merry-go-round  (Fig.  313). 
The  teeter  is  operated  by  turn- 
ing the  end  of  the  spool  axle  first 
one  way  then  the  other. 

The  Doll  Swing  shown  in  Fig. 
314  has  a  cardboard  base,  with  two 
spools  fastened  to  it  4  inches  apart 
to  support  the  framework.  Tack 
the  base  to  the  ends  of  the  spools. 
The  framework  uprights  are  tightly 
rolled  tubes  of  paper  10  or  12 
inches  long,  and  the  top  crosspiece 
is  another  paper  tube  4  inches  long.  Stick  the  lower 
ends  of  the  uprights  into  the  spool  holes ;  then  fasten 
the  crosspiece  to 
their  tops  by  run- 
ning pins  through 
it  and  into  the  up- 
right ends  (Fig. 
315),  and  then 
lashing  the  connec- 
tions with  thread  as 
shown  in  Fig.  314. 

The  swing  seat  is  made  of  a  spool  with  a  cardboard 


Fig.  317 

Figs.  316  and  317.  —  Details  of 

Swing  Seat. 


Fig.  31 


HOME-MADE   SPOOL  AND   CARDBOARD   TOYS 


203 


back  fastened  to  it   (Figs.   316  and  317).     Suspend  the 
spool  with  thread  from  the  top  of  the  swing  crosspiece. 

A  Sofa  with  arm 
rolls,  like  that  shown 
in  Fig.  318,  is  a  good 
example  of  what  can 
be  made  in  spool- 
and-cardboard  doll 
furniture.  Prepare 
the  seat  and  back  out 
of  a  single  piece  of 
cardboard,  curving  the  top  and  ends  of  the  back  as  shown, 
and  making  the  width  of  the  seat  the  same  as  the  length 
of  the  spool  arms.     Fasten  the  spools  by  means  of  a  strip 


Fig.  320 
Figs.  319-321.  —  Details  of  Sofa. 


Fig.  321 


Fig.  323 


Square  Center-Table. 

Fig.  322. 


Fig.  324.  —  Round  Center-Table. 


Chair. 


of  paper  bent  over  them  as  shown  in  Fig.  320,  and 
glued  to  the  seat.  Use  small  silk-thread  spools  (Fig. 
321)  for  feet,  and  glue  them  to  the  seat  at  the  four 
corners. 

The  Chair  (Fig.  322)  has  a  seat  and  back  made  out  of  a 


204  HOME-MADE  TOYS  FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 

single  piece  of  cardboard,  with  one-third  of  its  length  bent 
out  for  the  seat.     Glue  the  seat  to  a  spool  base. 

The  Square  Center-Table  (Fig.  323)  has  a  crochet- 
cotton  spool  pedestal,  and  its  top  is  a  square  piece  of  card- 
board.    Glue  the  spool  to  the  exact  center  of  the  top. 

The  Round  Center-Table  (Fig.  324)  is  made  similarly. 
Use  the  rim  of  a  cup  for  marking  out  the  circular  top. 

With  a  little  ingenuity  you  will  be  able  to  devise  a  great 
many  other  pieces  of  doll  furniture,  and  other  toys  as  well. 


CHAPTER   XX 
A  HOME-MADE   TOY  MAIL-BOX 

Who  wants  to  play  at  being  Uncle  Sam,  and  have  a 
postal  system  right  in  the  house,  or  out  on  the  front  porch 
where  it  will  be  convenient  for  the  children  next  door  to 
enjoy  it,  too  ?  Every  small  boy  and  girl  loves  to  play 
postman,  collect  mail  from  the  toy  mail-box,  cancel  the 
stamps,  sort  out  the  letters  into  the  proper  routes,  and 
then  deliver  them  to  those  whom  they  are  addressed  to. 

The  mail-box  shown  in  Figs.  325  and  326  is  easily  made, 
and  with 

The  Working  Material  on  hand  can  be  completed  in  an 
evening.  Two  sheets  of  cardboard,  a  piece  of  muslin, 
some  silver  paper  or  paint,  a  piece  of  tape  about  2  yards 
long,  and  a  needle  and  thread,  are  required.  The  card- 
board should  be  stiff  enough  to  hold  its  shape,  and  yet  be 
of  light  enough  weight  to  cut  and  fold  easily.  Sheets  22 
inches  by  28  inches  can  be  bought  at  any  printing-shop, 
and  at  some  stationery  stores,  and  will  not  cost  more  than 
10  cents  a  sheet  at  the  most.  If  you  have  some  large  card- 
board boxes,  however,  you  can  use  them  instead  by  so  laying 
out  the  different  parts  that  the  corners  of  the  boxes  will 
come  in  the  right  places  for  the  corners  of  the  mail-box. 

205 


206 


HOME-MADE   TOYS  FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 


Figure  327  shows  the  diagrams  for 

Making  the  Sides,  Ends,  and  Bottom  of  the  mail-box, 
with  the  dimensions  of  every  portion  marked  upon  them. 


Fig.  328 


CO 


V*j 

£ 

tO      TOP 

<£ 

7" 

to 

10" 

—              FLAP 

% 

END' 

FRONT          I 

^f"         in 

1 

6' 

(0 

BOTTOM 

9' 

3" 
Fig.  329 


Fig.  330 


FLAP               -J 

7$      -k\l 

f 

END 

1 

BACK        .    ! 

6" 

CM 

—  - 

Fig.  327 

BOTTOM     CD 

9" 

Fig.  327.  —  Diagram  for  Making  Sides,  Ends,  and  Bottom  of  Mail-Box. 

Fig.  328.  —  Diagram  for  Making  Top. 

Fig.  329.  —  Diagram  for  Making  End  Pieces  of  Letter-Drop. 

Fig.  330.  —  Diagram  for  Making  Front  Piece  of  Letter-Drop. 


Use  a  ruler  with  which  to  guide  your  pencil  in  drawing  the 
straight  lines,  and  a  compass  or  the  rim  of  a  9-inch  plate 
for  describing  the  arcs  for  the  round  tops  of  the  end  pieces. 
You  will  see  that  the  front,  one  end,  and  the  bottom  are 


A  HOME-MADE  TOY   MAIL-BOX 


207 


made  in  one  piece,  and  that  the  back,  other  end,  and  a 
second  bottom  (to  make  that  portion  doubly  strong)  are 
cut  from  another  piece. 

The  dotted  lines  upon 
the  diagram  indicate  where 
the  cardboard  should  be 
folded.  Figure  331  shows 
the  sides,  ends,  and  bot- 
tom folded  ready  to  be 
put  together.  Turn  the 
flaps  inside,  and  glue  them 
to  the  end  pieces,  and  glue 
the  two  bottom  pieces  to- 
gether ;  also  sew  the  card- 
board with  a  double  thread  to  make  the  joining  doubly  secure. 

The  Top  of  the  Box  —  the  diagram  for  the  cutting  of 

which    is    shown    in 


Fig.  331. — The  Sides,  Ends,  and  Bottom, 
folded  ready  to  be  put  Together. 


Fig.  332 


Fig.  333 


Fig.  335 


Fig.  332. — Top,  showing  how  Portion  is  Bent  up 

for  Back  of  Letter-Drop. 
Fig.  333.  —  Ends  of  Letter-Drop. 
Fig.  334.  —  Front  of  Letter-Drop. 
Fig.  335. — Top,  with  Letter-Drop  Completed. 


Fig.  328  —  has  a 
piece  3  by  7  inches 
cut  out  on  all  but  one 
long  side,  and  bent 
up  to  form  the  top  of 
The  Letter-Drop 
(Fig.  332).  The  dia- 
gram for  the  ends  of 
the  letter-drop   is 


shown  in  Fig.  329,  and  for  the  front  in  Fig.  330;  Fig.  333 
shows  how  cloth  flaps  are  glued  to  the  end  piece  ;  and  Fig. 


208 


HOME-MADE   TOYS   FOR   GIRLS   AND   BOYS 


Fig.  336 


335  shows  how  the  end  pieces  are  fastened  to  the  top  of 
the  box  by  means  of  these  flaps.  Glue  a  strip  of  cloth  to 
each  side  of  the  lower  edge  of  the  letter-drop  front  piece 
for  hinges  (Fig.  334),  and  glue  one  to  the  inside  and  the 
other  to  the  outside  of  the  top  of  the  box  (Fig.  335). 
Attach  rubber-bands  to  the  front  and  ends  of  the  drop 

to  make  it 
spring  shut. 
Glue  and  sew 
the  top  of  the 
box  to  the  flaps 
provided  on 
the  front  and 
back  for  the 
purpose. 

Figure  336 
shows  the  dia- 
gram for 

The  Collec- 
tion-Drop, and 
Fig.  337  how 
it  looks  folded. 

Hinge  the  drop  to  the  box  with  a  cloth  strip  (Fig.  338). 
Reinforcement.  When  the  work  has  been  finished  thus 
far,  cut  a  number  of  strips  of  muslin  1  inch  wide  and  rein- 
force the  corners  with  them.  Then  take  the  2-yard  length 
of  tape,  which  you  procured,  and  sew  it  to  the  back  of  the 
box  to  hang  it  up  by. 


Fig-  337  Fig.  338 

Fig.  336.  —  Diagram  for  Making  Collection-Drop. 
Fig.  337.  —  How  the  Collection-Drop  is  Folded. 
Fig.  338. — The  Collection-Drop  Hinged  in  Place. 


A  HOME-MADE   TOY  MAIL-BOX  209 

Covering  the  Box.  Silver  paper  makes  the  nicest 
finish  for  the  mail-box,  and  can  be  bought  of  a  stationer ; 
but  you  may  paint  the  cardboard  with  aluminum  radiator 
paint  instead  if  you  prefer.  If  you  use  silver  paper,  stick 
it  on  with  flour  paste. 

After  the  paper  or  paint  has  dried,  paste 

A  Collection  Schedule  Card  upon  the  front  of  the  box. 
You  will  need,  also,  to 

Letter  the  words,  "  Pull  Down,"  "  Letters,"  etc.,  where 
they  are  shown  in  the  illustrations. 

Hang  up  the  Mail-Box  by  means  of  its  tape  strap,  within 
easy  reach,  upon  the  face  of  a  door  (Fig.  325),  or  to  the  back 
of  a  chair  (Fig.  326). 

For  a  Mail-Bag  use  a  school-book  bag,  or  make  one  just 
like  a  real  postman's  out  of  brown  denim  or  cambric. 
Letter  "  U.  S.  Mail  "  upon  the  bag  with  black  paint,  or 
cut  the  letters  from  black  or  white  muslin  and  glue  them  in 
place.  Provide  a  long  strap  to  reach  over  the  postman's 
shoulder. 

The  Way  to  Play  Post-Office  is  for  several  children  to 
attend  to  the  writing  of  letters  and  wrapping  of  parcels, 
another  to  play  mail  clerk,  who  puts  the  post-marks  on  the 
mail  and  sorts  it  out  into  "  routes  "  and  another  to  play 
postman. 

Canceled  stamps  from  old  letters  may  be  re-used  on  the 
play  letters,  and  a  rubber-stamp  dater  such  as  they  sell  at 
the  stationer's  for  10  cents  may  be  used  for  printing  the 
post-marks. 


CHAPTER  XXI 


A   HOME-MADE   REFLECTOSCOPE 


This  reflecting  lantern,  shown  completed  in  Fig.   339, 
is  more  magical  in  its  operation  than  a  magic-lantern  is, 

because,  instead  of 


Fig-  340  V 


Fig.  339 

Fig.  339. — The  Complete  Reflectoscope. 
Fig.  340.  —  Detail  of  Ventilator  Top. 


projecting  through 
transparent  slides, 
it  reflects  opaque 
pictures.  That 
makes  it  possible 
to  use  magazine 
and  newspaper 
pictures,  post 
cards,  and  photo- 
graph  prints. 
You  may  reflect  a 
greatly  enlarged 
picture  of  the 
movements  of  your 
watch,  and  by  plac- 
ing  your  face 
against   the   open- 


ing in  the  reflectoscope,  you  may  show  a  view  of  your 


A  HOME-MADE  REFLECTOSCOPE 


2IT 


Fig.  341.  — Plan  of  Refiectoscope. 


mouth  opening  and  closing,  giant  size.      The  ease  with 

which  slides  are  obtained  makes  this  a  desirable  lantern 

to  own. 

The  Material.    You 

must  get  a  box  about 

10  by  10  by  20  inches 

in  size  for  the  case  of 

the  refiectoscope,  two 

oil-lamps,  or   two   16 

or    32     candle-power 

electric    lamps    with 

the    parts    necessary 

for  connecting  them  to  the  electric  lighting  circuit,  three 

1 -lb.  baking-powder  cans  and  two  tomato  cans,  two  pieces 

of  tin  about  6  by  10 
inches  in  size,  and  a 
lens  from  a  camera, 
field  glass,  opera  glass, 
magic-lantern  or  bicy- 
cle-lamp. 

The  bottom  of  the 
box  will  be  the  front 
of  the  refiectoscope. 

Cut  the  Lens  Open- 
ing through  this,  at 
the  center  of  its  length, 

and  a  trifle  above  the  center  of  its  width.     Make  the  hole 

a  trifle  larger  than  the  lens. 


Jg„; 


:^a 


r 
I 


Fig.  342.  —  Cross-section  of  Refiectoscope. 


212  HOME-MADE   TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND   BOYS 

Cut  Ventilator  Holes  3  inches  in  diameter  through  the 
uppermost  side  of  the  box,  near  to  the  ends  and  bottom. 

Figures  341  and  342  show 

The  Interior  Arrangement  of  the  rerlectoscope.  Place 
the  lamps  in  the  corners  of  the  box,  next  to  the  front,  and 
tack  in  back  of  them  the  pieces  of  tin  for  reflectors  (A, 
Figs.  341  and  342).     Bend  the  reflectors  to  the  curve  shown. 

If  Oil  Lamps  are  Used,  their  tops  will  project  through  the 
ventilation  holes,  as  shown  in  Fig.  342.  These  openings 
must  be  inclosed  with 

A  Hood  which  will  Conceal  the  Light,  yet  allow  the  heat 
to  escape.  The  most  satisfactory  arrangement  is  that 
shown  in  Figs.  339  and  342.  A  baking-powder  can  with 
its  bottom  removed  (B)  is  slipped  over  the  lamp  chimney 
and  fitted  into  the  ventilation  hole;  then  a  tomato-can 
(C)  is  inverted  over  the  top  of  the  can  and  fastened  in  the 
slotted  ends  of  three  wooden  peg  stilts  (D,  Fig.  340),  and 
the  pegs  are  fitted  into  holes  made  in  the  top  of  the  box 
(Figs.  339  and  342).  Fasten  the  can  in  the  slots  of  the 
stilts  with  tacks  (Fig.  340). 

If  Electric  Light  is  Used,  the  hooded  ventilators  may  be 
omitted.  Any  boy  who  understands  the  wiring  of  electric- 
lamp  sockets,  plugs,  and  drop-cord  will  know  how  to  wire 
up  the  rerlectoscope. 

Mount  the  Lens  in  a  can  or  mailing-tube  jacket  (Fig. 
343).  If  you  use  a  can,  remove  the  bottom.  If  the  lens 
is  smaller  in  diameter,  make  a  band  of  cardboard  strips  to 
fit  around  the  edge,  as  shown  in  Fig.  344,  and  glue  these 


A   HOME-MADE  REFLECTOSCOPE 


213 


strips  to  the  inside  of  the  can  or  mailing-tube.  The  lens 
jacket  should  fit  loosely  enough  in  the  reflectoscope  box 
opening  so  it  will  slide  back  and  forth  for  focusing.  Make  a 
tin  collar  to  fit  around  the  jacket,  and  tack  it  to  the  front 
of  the  box,  to  pre- 
vent light  from  es- 
caping (Fig.  339). 

Before  putting  on 
the  back  of  the 
reflectoscope  box, 

Putty  up  all 
Cracks  between 
the  boards  in  the 
top  and  front,  to 
make  the  box 
light-tight ;    then 

Paint  the  Inside 
of  the  Box  and 
the  cover  boards 
with  lamp-black 
thinned  with  tur- 
pentine, so  there 
will  be  no  reflec- 
tions other  than  those  produced  by  the  lamp  reflectors  and 
the  picture. 

Nail  the  Back  Boards  in  Place,  leaving  an  opening  about 
7  inches  square  directly  opposite  the  lens.  Cut  a  piece 
of  board  to  fit  this  opening  (E,  Fig.  345)  for 


Fig.  346 


Fig.  344 


Figs.  343  and  344.  —  Details  of  Lens  Mounting. 
Fig.  345.  — View  of  Back  of  Reflectoscope. 
Fig.  346.  —  Detail  of  Post  Card  Holder. 


214  HOME-MADE   TOYS   FOR   GIRLS  AND-  BOYS 

The  Picture  Holder,  and  hinge  it  in  place.  A  frame  for 
post  cards  to  slide  in  should  be  fastened  to  the  picture 
holder,  as  shown  in  Fig.  346.  First  nail  strips  F  to  board 
E,  then  tack  strips  G  to  them  so  their  edges  project  over 
strips  F.  A  little  wooden  button  (H,  Fig.  345)  will  fasten 
the  holder  board  shut  while  each  picture  is  being  projected. 

The  Lens  Reverses  Pictures  in  projecting  them,  and  in 
order  to  have  them  projected  right-side  up  on  the  screen  it 
is  necessary  to  slip  them  into  the  holder  frame  upside  down. 

Adjustments.  After  you  have  built  your  reflectoscope, 
you  may  find  it  does  not  throw  sharply-defined  images  upon 
your  projection  screen.  In  that  case  you  must  readjust  the 
focus  of  the  lens,  the  curve  of  the  lamp  reflectors,  and 
the  distance  between  the  lens  and  the  projection  screen, 
until  the  best  possible  results  are  obtained.  Inasmuch  as 
the  positions  will  vary  with  different  lenses,  it  is  impossible 
for  me  to  give  any  hard  and  fast  measurements.  You 
will  have  to  determine  the  distances  yourself. 

The  stronger  the  light,  the  brighter  the  projected  image 
will  be ;  therefore,  use  the  strongest  light  you  can  get,  and 
place  the  lantern  not  more  than  five  feet  away  from  the  screen. 

Unless  you  use  an  anastigmat  lens  such  as  the  better 
grade  of  cameras  are  fitted  with,  you  will  discover  that  the 
corners  of  pictures  are  indistinct  when  you  have  brought 
the  centers  to  a  sharp  focus.  This  indistinctness  can  be 
corrected  to  a  great  extent  by  blocking  out  the  holder  to 
curve  the  post  cards  and  other  pictures  so  that  the  ends 
are  closer  to  the  lens  than  the  center  is. 


INDEX 


Airships,"  clockwork  "flying,  102. 
Animal  targets  for  toy  shooting  gallery, 

142. 
Apartment  building,  doll,  165. 
Automobile,  clockwork,  104. 
Automobile  delivery  wagon,  clockwork. 

112;  cigar-box,  192. 


B 


Baby  carriage,  doll,  196. 
Ballast,  toy  elevator,  63. 
Balusters,  doll-house  stairway,  154. 
Battery,  a  bi-chromate  of  potash,  135. 
Bead  portieres,  doll- house,  157. 
Beds,  doll-house,  183,  187. 
Bi-chromate  battery  fluid,  136. 
Boat,  toy  motor-,  33. 
Box-kite,  12. 

Bridle,  Malay  kite,  12;  box-kite,  16. 
Buzz-saw  whirligig,  71. 


Cables,  toy  elevator,  61,  69;  electro- 
magnet derrick,  123. 

Cardboard  toys,  196. 

Carpets,  doll -house,  157. 

Carriage,  doll  baby,  196. 

Cars,  toy  railway,  50;  gondola,  52; 
street,  52;  other  forms  of,  56;  eleva- 
tor, 60,  68,  150;   Ferris  wheel,  99. 

Cart,  cigar-box,  192  ;   cardboard,  199. 

Chairs,  cigar-box,  176,  194,  195;  card- 
board, 203. 

Chauffeur  for  clockwork  automobile,  111. 


Cigar-boxes,  to  prepare,  for  use,  175. 

Cigar-box  toys,  191. 

Clock,  a  grandfather's,  182. 

Clock  wheel  top,  81. 

Clockwork  automobile,  104. 

Clockwork  automobile  delivery  wagon, 

112. 
Clockwork  Ferris  wheel,  96. 
Clockwork  "flying  airships,"  102. 
Clockwork  merry-go-round,  89. 
Clockwork  motors,   89,   97;    increasing 

speed  of,  103. 
Clockwork  railway,  116. 
Clockwork  toys,  88. 
Clog-dancer,  toy,  72. 
Control,  toy  elevator,  65. 
Cosey-corner,  doll-house,  158. 
Counter-balance,  61,  69. 
Cradle,  doll's,  195. 
Cricket-rattle,  75. 
Curtains,  doll-house,  157. 


L) 


Decorating,  doll-house,  156;  doll  apart- 
ment, 173. 

Delivery-wagon,  clockwork  automobile, 
112 ;   cigar-box,  192. 

Derrick,  electro-magnet,  117. 

Doll  apartment  building,  165. 

Doll-house,  145  ;   furnishing  the,  156. 

Dresser,  doll,  185,  189. 


Egg-beater  motor-winder,  31. 

Electrical  toys,  117. 

Electric  motor  truck,  toy,  132. 


21S 


2l6 


INDEX 


Electro-magnet,  118. 

Electro-magnet  derrick,  117. 

Elevator,  model  aeroplane,  25. 

Elevators,  toy,  59. 

Elevator,    toy   office   building,    59;     an 

outdoor,  67  ;  doll-house,  148. 
Enlarging  by  squares,  175. 
Express-wagon,  cigar-box,  192. 


Feed-hoist,  toy  stable,  163. 

Feed-troughs,  toy  stable,  162. 

Ferris  wheel,  clockwork,  96. 

Fin,  model  aeroplane,  26. 

Fireplace,  doll  apartment,  171. 

Fixtures,  doll  apartment  lighting,  171. 

Floors,  toy  office  building,  59;  hard- 
wood, for  doll-house,  157. 

"Flying  airships,"  clockwork,  102. 

Flying-line  for  kites,  12. 

Folding-bed,  doll,  187. 

Furniture,  cigar-box,  174,  194;  card- 
board, 203. 

Fuselage,  model  aeroplane,  22. 


Gable-ends,  doll-house,  151 ;   toy  stable, 

161. 
Garage,  toy  (see  Stable). 
Gondola  car,  52. 
Grandfather's  clock,  182. 
Guides,  toy  elevator,  61,  69,  150. 

H 

Hand-rail,  doll-house  stairway,  153. 
Horses  for  merry-go-round,   cardboard, 

86,  92. 
House,  doll-,  145  ;    furnishing  the  doll-, 

156;    doll  apartment,  165;    furniture 

for  doll-,  174,  194,  203. 


Induction-coil,  126. 
Interrupter,  shocking-machine, 


29. 


J 

Jack-in-the-box,  cigar-box,  193. 

Jumping-Jack,  74. 

Jumping- Jack  operated  by  windmill,  7. 

K 

Kite,  a  Malay,  9;   a  box-,  12. 
Kite-reel,  a  hand,  17 ;   a  body,  19. 


Launching  a  model  aeroplane,  31. 
Lighting  fixtures,  doll  apartment,  171. 

M 

Magnet,  electro-,  118. 

Mail-bag,  toy,  209. 

Mail-box,  toy,  205. 

Malay  kite,  9. 

Mantel,  doll  apartment,  171. 

Mechanical  toys,  71. 

Merry-go-round,    top,    85 ;     clockwork, 

89;   cardboard,  201. 
Mirror,  doll-house,  181. 
Mission  furniture,  doll,  174. 
Model  aeroplane,  21 ;  propellers  for,  27; 

motors  for,  29;  motor-winder  for,  31 ; 

launching  a,  31. 
Motor-boat,  toy,  33. 
Motors,  clockwork,  89,  97;    increasing 

speed  of,  103. 
Motors,   model  aeroplane,    29;    winder 

for,  31. 
Motors,  water-  (see  Water-Motor). 
Motor,  toy  motor-boat,  37. 
Motor  truck,  toy  electric,  132. 
Motor-winder,  egg-beater,  31. 

N 
Newel-post,  doll-house  stairway,  153. 

O 

Office  building  elevator,  toy,  59. 


INDEX 


217 


Partitions,  toy  office  building,  60;  doll- 
house,  145  ;    stable  stall,  162. 

Pictures,  doll-house,  158. 

Pinion-wheel  windmill,  2. 

Pinwheel,  a  paper,  1. 

Pistol,  toy,  card-shooting,  143. 

Planes,  model  aeroplane,  24. 

Portieres,  doll-house,  157. 

Post-office  with  mail-box,  to  play,  209. 

Primary  coil,  induction-coil,  127. 

Propeller-shaft,  model  aeroplane,  29 ; 
toy  motor-boat,  35. 

Propellers,  model  aeroplane,  27. 

Propeller,  toy  motor-boat,  35. 

Pulley-wheel,  42,  45,  62,  151. 

R 

Race-track,  spinning- top,  82. 

Railway,  toy,  47 ;  trolley-line  for,  47 ; 
power  for,  49;  tracks  for,  50;  cars 
for,  50;  gondola  car  for,  52;  street 
car  for,  52  ;  other  cars  for,  56 ;  opera- 
tion of,  56;  station  for,  57;  clock- 
work, 116. 

Rattle,  cricket,  75. 

Reel,  a  hand  kite-,  17;   a  body  kite-,  19. 

Reflectoscope,  210. 

Riders  for  merry-go-round,  86,  94. 

Risers,  doll-house  stairway,  153. 

Rugs,  doll-house,  157. 

Rug-tack  top,  82. 

S 

Secondary-coil,  induction-coil,  127. 

Settee,  doll,  178. 

Shocking  machine,  124. 

Shoe-polish  can  top,  83. 

Shooting  gallery,  toy,  140. 

Side-board,  doll,  180. 

Sleighs  for  merry-go-round ,  cardboard ,  93 . 

Sofa,  doll,  203. 

Spinning- top  race-track,  82. 

Spiral  top,  85. 

Spool  and  cardboard  toys,  196. 

Spool  top,  82. 


Stable,  toy,  160. 

Stairway  for  doll-house,  152,  154. 

Station  for  toy  railway,  57. 

Straw  portieres,  doll-house,  158. 

Street  car,  toy,  52. 

Swing,  doll,  202. 

Switch,  electro-magnet  derrick,  121. 


Tables,  cigar-box,  179,  180,  194;  card- 
board, 204. 

Tack  top,  82. 

Targets,  toy  shooting  gallery,  142. 

Teeter-board,  201. 

Thrust  bearings,  23,  35. 

Top,  clockwork,  81 ;  rug- tack,  82 ; 
spool,  82;  spinning,  racetrack,  82; 
shoe-polish  can,  83;  spiral,  85; 
merry-go-round,  85. 

Tops,  79. 

Track,  spinning- top  race,  82. 

Tracks,  toy  railway,  50. 

Treads,  doll-house  stairway,  153. 

Trolley-line,  toy  railway,  47. 

Troughs,  toy  stable  feed-,  162. 

Truck,  toy  electric  motor,  132. 

Turtle  toy,  76. 

V 

Varnish-can  water-motor,  38. 

W 

Wagon,  cigar-box  express-,  192. 

Wardrobe,  doll,  190. 

Wash-stand,  doll,  186. 

Water-motor,  a  varnish-can,  38 ;  another 

form  of,  42. 
Wheel,  clockwork  Ferris,  96. 
Wheel,  water-motor,  39,  43. 
Whirligig,  a  buzz-saw,  71. 
Winder,  model  aeroplane  motor-,  31. 
Windlass,  electro-magnet  derrick,  123. 
Windmill,  a  paper,  1 ;  a  pinion-wheel,  2  ; 

a   four-blade,   4 ;    an   eight-blade,  5 ; 

jumping-Jack  operated  by  a,  7. 
Window-shades,  doll-house,  157. 


CEN  I 


V 


kt 


MAR  2  2  1930 


I